JP6672613B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed.

  Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games.

JP 2003-265765 A

  By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine merely controls the switching of the entrance to be opened as a privilege game, and further interest in the game has been demanded.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having the above-mentioned gaming machine, in which the interest of the game is further improved.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine of the present invention comprises a first variable ball entry means capable of being changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and A second variable ball entry means disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means and capable of being changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can enter; Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a bonus game is executed in which the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means are varied in a predetermined order to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The second variable ball entry means sets a game state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the privilege game based on the passing of the game ball. A specific area to be played and a game ball having entered the second variable entry means Wherein the first and the state can pass through the particular region, varying in its second state in which gaming balls which have entered the special second variable ball entrance unit than the first state is difficult to pass through the specific region And a variable means, wherein the gaming machine is located between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, and does not enter the first variable ball-in means but downstream. A guiding means capable of setting a period until a game ball flowing down to the second variable ball entry means to a predetermined period or more, and the first variable ball entry means when the privilege game is executed. anda setting means capable of setting one of a pattern from a plurality of patterns and said second variable ball entrance means as a timing for varying to each of said open state, Rukoto set by the setting means as before Symbol plurality of patterns that can be, first putter When, which the specific area gaming ball has at least a hard second pattern to pass than the first pattern, the second pattern, the said first variable ball entrance means A period during which the second variable ball-in means is in the open state in a state in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball-in means can pass through the specific area after being changed from the open state to the closed state. Is configured to be shorter than the predetermined time period, and the variable means includes a second variable input ball when the second variable input ball means is opened from the closed state to the open state. A first operation that is changed from the second state to the first state in a period shorter than a period until the game ball that has entered the ball means reaches the variable means; Until the entered game ball reaches the variable means And a second operation that is changed from the second state to the first state in a period longer than the period of time. The gaming machine sets the first pattern by the setting unit. The ratio can be changed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to the gaming machine of this invention, the 1st variable ball entry means which can be changed from the closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to the open state in which a game ball can enter, and the 1st variable ball entry means A second variable ball entry means arranged downstream of the means and capable of being changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a specific condition being satisfied. A bonus game which can execute a bonus game in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are changed in the predetermined order in the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on Game execution means, the second variable ball entry means, based on the passing of the game ball, a specific area in which a game state that is advantageous to the player after the privilege game is completed is set The game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means passes through the specific area. A first state capable, and varying means for varying the its second state in which gaming balls which have entered the special second variable ball entrance unit than the first state is difficult to pass through the specific region, the The game machine has a game ball between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, which has flowed downstream without entering the first variable ball-in means. A guiding means capable of setting a period until the second variable entering means reaches a predetermined period or more, and the first variable entering means and the second variable entering means when the privilege game is executed. comprising a setting unit capable of setting one of a pattern from a plurality of patterns ball entrance means and as timing for varying to each of said open state, the front Symbol capable Rukoto set by the setting means as a plurality of patterns, a first pattern, the first pattern Are those of the specific region is the game ball has at least a hard second pattern to pass through than down, the second pattern, the closing of the first variable ball entrance means from said open state After the state, the period in which the second variable ball-in means is in the open state in a state in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball-in means can pass through the specific area is the predetermined period. The variable means is configured to enter the second variable ball-in means when the second variable ball-in means is opened from the closed state to the open state. A first operation in which the second state is changed from the second state to the first state in a period shorter than a period in which the changed game ball reaches the variable means, and a game ball entered in the second variable ball input means Is longer than the period until the variable means is reached. At least a second operation that is changed from the second state to the first state is performed, and the gaming machine sets the ratio at which the first pattern is set by the setting unit under a predetermined condition. It is configured to be variable based on the establishment. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device with a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the variable winning device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment, (b) is a big hit type selected in each game state in the first embodiment, and a case where a big hit type is selected FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a game state in which a transition is made to FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a figure of a display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the probability-change game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the probability-change game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the first embodiment; (b) is a diagram schematically showing a small random number table in the first embodiment; FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device 110 according to the first embodiment. FIGS. 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device 110 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of a main control device 110 according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating special figure 1 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation changing process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a first prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a second prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a notification process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a stop type command reception process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed information lottery processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command receiving process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in a normal play state or a latently probable play state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the latent probability changing game state or the probability changing game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of the front of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the big hit game in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a small random number table in the second embodiment, (b) FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device 110 according to a second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device 110 according to a second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of main controller 110 in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose variation pattern table set in a ROM of a main controller 110 according to a second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric auditors product operation table set to ROM. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a RAM. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in the 1st modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in the 2nd modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. On the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 includes a decision switch (a) for deciding the selection of an effect or the like, a left switch 600b for instructing a leftward selection, and an instructing upward selection. The upper switch 600c includes a right switch 600d for instructing a rightward selection, and a lower switch 600e for instructing a downward selection.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 and other control devices may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of balls and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a first starting port 63 a, The starter 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back surface of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a game board. 13 is fixed from the front side by wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 (a starting port or the like is provided, and a shot ball is provided). Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first ordinary symbol starting port 67a and a second ordinary symbol starting port 67b below the first ordinary symbol starting port 67b are provided. The first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b are formed in the same shape, and are configured as a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. I have. When the game ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, a lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, it is determined whether or not the game is a normal symbol.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67 or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the ball passes the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a is equal to that of the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a. It is held up to four times in total with the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol starting port 67 (the first normal symbol starting port 67b or the second normal symbol starting port 67b) remains, the following is performed. Normally, a lottery of a symbol is performed, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 operates. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and is spaced apart from the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b so that one game ball can pass left and right. Normally, it is kept upright. A predetermined angle (in the present embodiment, the left guiding member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guiding member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b stand substantially vertically. When the game ball moves (that is, is changed to the open state) and the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member guide the game ball to the second starting port 640, the game ball enters the second starting port 640. It is in an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next ordinary symbol (second symbol) is changed.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have won the first starting opening 630, the right starting opening 631, the second starting opening 640, the first normal design starting opening (through gate) 67a, and the second normal design starting opening (through gate) 67b. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. The number of rounds during the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The seven-segment display 37b includes two right and left seven-segment LEDs. In the 7-segment LED on the left side, a first special symbol indicating a determination (lottery) result of a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) based on winning in the first starting port 630 or the right starting port 631 is dynamically displayed (dynamic) Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the seven-segment display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 elapses. After the center segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is off, a symbol "-" indicating the off state in which one central segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as “3” or “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed.

  A second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the result of the determination (lottery) of the lottery (second lottery game) based on winning in the second starting port 640 is displayed on the right-hand 7-segment LED (dynamic display). Specifically, it is displayed until the fluctuation time determined based on the winning in the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  In addition, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). Thus, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the seven-segment display 37b, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  As will be described later, a variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, based on a fluctuation pattern that becomes a reach and a fluctuation pattern that becomes a non-reach. In this manner, even when roughly sorted based on a fixed time reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), dynamic information related to time information can be used. This corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the change start time corresponds to the time when the accurate change starts, and the time information of the rough change pattern described above (for example, whether the time information is a long time change pattern). No. or the like), information on time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined on the basis of the above is also applicable.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for the winning in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, a big hit is made. In addition to performing the success / failure determination of the success (big hit lottery), the big hit type is also determined. The jackpot types determined here are the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probable jackpot), jackpot B (15R ordinary jackpot), jackpot E (15R ordinary jackpot (electric supporter) 16) are set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of the electric support of the big hit E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set so as to be easily set to the special state (open state). In the big hit E, after the 15 round big hit game, the electric support state is set until the number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 in total.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variable jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable prize devices 65 are arranged as the prize devices that are operated in the open state during the big hit game. The variable prize device 65 is operated so that the first specific prize port 65a is opened 15 times for the jackpots A to E until a predetermined period or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter. .

  The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 65 b to form the variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. It has a placed LED board 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. Opening / closing unit 65f, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, a back cover body 65e and a flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, and a rear surface that is disposed on the rear side of the flow channel cover body 65g. A cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and the flow path solenoid 65k is covered from the back side and fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. 65m for fixing.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the variable winning device 65 has a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward and leftward so that a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side, and a non-entry state. It is changed to a closed state in which it is possible (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper portion of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting port 631 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during a time-saving game (including during a probability change game), it is possible to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 with the right-handed state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the game method is changed to the left-handed. The trouble of changing can be reduced. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of a guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probable change switch 65e3 formed of a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge port 65e2 and configured to detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability game state (the probability change state) by the passing of the game ball through the above-described probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. (Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or a certain-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the gaming ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game Can be. The minimum time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. . The operation timing and operation time of the operation of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds at the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Have been. In addition, when the jackpot B and the jackpot E are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, at the big hit A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the positive change switch 65e3, but at the big hit B, it cannot be passed through the positive change switch 65e3. Have been. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability change giving ratio depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure so as not to cause excessive advantage and disadvantage.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, there is provided a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game ball won before the 14th round is won in the 14th round in a state where the game ball has not been ejected, and the jackpot B is won even in the probability change switch 65e3.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 award balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the detected game ball to determine whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to provide the probability change game state. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a certain variation game state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type generated for each special symbol in various game states, and a gaming state to which the game shifts after the jackpot occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four game states are set as the game states. The first one is a normal game state ST <b> 1 in which the special symbol has a low jackpot probability of a low probability (normal) and a game state without electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The third is a gaming state in which the special symbol has a low probability of winning (normal) as in the normal gaming state ST1, but has the electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the special symbol jackpot probability is high, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The fourth is a gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is high and the electric support is present (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in a special state (open state)). A certain probable transformation support game state (so-called probable game state) ST3.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the first special symbol and the change of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. However, in each game state, one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a substantially changed object). Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is not substantially the target of fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is the target of the real fluctuation. In addition, a game state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the starting port for performing a lottery of a special symbol that is not substantially fluctuated, or a game ball enters the starting port for performing a lottery of a special pattern that is a fluctuating substance. The game state is configured to be easy to play. Thereby, the jackpot of the special symbol which is not substantially changed can be substantially not generated (it is hard to generate), and the big jackpot of the special symbol which is the object of the substantial change can be substantially generated (made easy to generate).

  Note that the method of making any one of the special symbols substantially the subject of fluctuation is not limited to the method described above. For example, a normal electric accessory is provided at each of a starting port which is a lottery trigger of a first special symbol and a starting port which is a lottery trigger of a second special symbol. Then, in each game state, it is conceivable that only the ordinary electric accessory of the starting port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially fluctuated is moved (or easily operated). As a result, the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol which is the subject of substantial variation, and the game ball does not enter (it is difficult to enter) the starting opening corresponding to the special symbol which is not the subject of substantial variation. Can be. In this case, the lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be separately performed. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on entry (passing) to the first ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a first ordinary symbol lottery), and the other ordinary electric accessory is moved. The lottery to be performed may be performed by entering (passing) the ball into the second ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a second ordinary symbol lottery). Furthermore, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be simultaneously executed. In the same manner as the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment, when the lottery of one ordinary symbol is a big hit, Alternatively, the lottery for the other ordinary symbol may be lost. Thereby, the variation of the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol have different probabilities of selecting the jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. That is, there is a difference in the probability that the state can be shifted (looped) to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) ( 34%), that is, a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). In the following, in describing the flow in which various game states are set, for convenience, a jackpot that enables transition to a high-probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) is selected (occurred). In this case, the description will be made assuming that the game state shifts to the high-probability game state (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

  In each game state, by setting a special symbol to be a substantial fluctuation target, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state or to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. Thereby, in each game state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of a ratio (probability) of transition (loop) to the high probability game state after the big hit The transition to the high-probability gaming state can be set to a state of high probability or low probability. Therefore, variations in the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probable change game state ST3 which is a high-probability game state, the real fluctuation target is set to the special figure 1 to make the game state easy to shift (fall) to the low-probability state, which is also the high-probability game state. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, by setting the substantial fluctuation target to the special figure 2, it is possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state. In other words, even in the same high-probability game state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol to be substantially fluctuated, it is possible to change the distribution of the game state to be shifted after the end of the big hit game, Variations in which the game state shifts can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. First, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (a state where the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a substantially variable target. In other words, the game state has a low probability (34%) of the occurrence of the jackpot to shift to the high-probability game state (probability rate). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (see FIG. 17). Then, in the first special symbol jackpot, the jackpot A (15R probability change jackpot) which shifts to the high-probability game state is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot B (15R regular jackpot) which remains in the low-probability state. Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIGS. 7B and 16).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is not substantially the fluctuation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) is out of order, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to execute 2160 to 8200 times of lottery in the first special symbol while the second special symbol deviates and fluctuates once. The jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability state) is 1/400. Therefore, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot in the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol that has been removed fluctuates once. Is configured to occur. In addition, the business hours of the game store are mainly about 15 hours from 9:00 in the morning to 11 at night, and thus are set to be longer than that. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the second lottery game is executed, the deviation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With such a configuration, in the normal game state ST1, a big hit of the first special symbol (the special figure 1), which is a substantially fluctuating object, is generated (easy).

  If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the success / failure determination is not out of the ordinary but wins, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but when the change based on the big hit is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the change based on the other special symbol is out. This is because it is controlled so that If 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time when the result of the determination of the special figure 2 is a hit, the fluctuation based on the big hit of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. Therefore, there is a problem that the fluctuation (first lottery game) based on the special map 1 executed during the business hours is controlled so as to be all out (not a big hit). Therefore, the change based on the jackpot in Tokuzu 2 is set to a time (10 minutes) that can be completed within business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

  However, if the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Toku-zu 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the result of determining whether or not the Toku-zu 2 is successful in a short time. The act may be performed. For example, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port 640, and it is determined that the result of judging whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order based on the entered ball (the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is executed for longer than 0.5 seconds). In such a case, there is a possibility that an illegal act of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 (so-called reset goto) may be executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal game state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation stop). Is done). Therefore, by repeating the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto), it is possible to generate a jackpot based on Toku-zu 2, which is not substantially a target of change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes, so that the player cannot determine the result of the determination (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto), so that the executable frequency of the fraudulent act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of the special figure 2 by the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto).

  It should be noted that the variation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to the above-described one, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally fired (for example, a right-handed game), the right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1 (the second lottery game is performed). As a penalty, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot in Toku-zu 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that an improper act (right-handed game in the normal game state ST1) is being executed (or executed).

  In the pachinko machine 10, the second start port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game that passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 (right-handed game). In the normal gaming state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is hardly set to the special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting port 631). Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the normal gaming state ST1, the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is the target of substantial variation is difficult to be executed, and the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not the target of substantial variation is easily executed. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous for the player than playing a game (left-handed game) by passing a game ball on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, the player performs a left-handed game. When a left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 640, but enters the first starting port 630. As a result, a gaming state in which a big hit of the second special symbol does not occur (it is difficult to generate) and a big hit of the first special symbol occurs (it is easy to make), that is, a gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state. Can be.

  In the normal game state ST1, the big hit B occurs, and after the big hit game of the big hit B is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (transferred). On the other hand, after the big hit A occurs and the big hit game is executed, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set to be 10 times higher than the normal gaming state ST1 (high probability gaming state), and the second special symbol is a gaming state in which the second special symbol is substantially changed. That is, the gaming state has a high probability (probable change rate) that a jackpot capable of continuing the high-probability gaming state is high. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thus, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, by performing the right-handed game, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed. In the jackpot of the second special symbol, a jackpot C (15R probability-change jackpot) in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot is shifted to the probability changing game state ST3. D (15R probable jackpot) is selected with a 34% probability.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is not the actual fluctuation target, is set long. Specifically, when the result of the first special symbol determination (lottery) is out of order, a variation time of 1800000 ms (30 minutes) is selected (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute a maximum of 3600 lotteries in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. The jackpot probability during the probable change (high-probability gaming state) is 1/40. Therefore, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot is won by the second special symbol until the first special symbol that is out of the normal game finishes changing once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the first special symbol hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation time is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 18A). In the latent probability changing game state ST2, if the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can continue the game without lowering the game efficiency (rotation rate).

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol lottery result is a small win with a probability of 8/400 as a lottery result. In the small hit in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about three game balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is 15 balls, about 45 balls are paid out to the player per small hit game. Thus, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, a right-handed game can be executed in an advantageous state (a state in which the consumption of the held ball is suppressed) as compared with the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the second special symbol is a big hit, and when the big hit D (15R probability changing big hit) is selected, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again (loop). On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R certain-change big-hit) is selected, thereafter, a game state with a certain-variable-power-supply support (the certain-change game state ST3) is set.

  The certain change game state ST3 is a game state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to be 10 times higher (set to the high probability game state), and the first special symbol is a game state in which the first special symbol is substantially changed. Further, the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is also easily selected to be short (see FIG. 19). In addition, the time (opening time) during which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is set longer than in the normal game state ST1 and the latent change probability game state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits right, the player can easily win the right first starting port 631. In this embodiment, 95% of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% are out balls and consumed. Therefore, in the probable change game state, about 99% of the right-hit game balls will win the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and 99% of the right-hit game balls will play as prize balls. Is paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the ball possessed by the player.

  In the probable change game state ST3, the second special symbol lottery result is a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in the certain variation game state ST3, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too advantageous for the player in the probable change game state ST3. The present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball may enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, the privilege for the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is not substantially changed is set to be long, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is substantially changed is set to be short. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) regardless of the result of the win / fail determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, if the result of the determination (lottery) is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected to be 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, it is possible to execute a maximum of 3600 lotteries in the first special symbol while the second special symbol deviates and fluctuates once. The jackpot probability during the probable change (high-probability gaming state) is 1/40. Therefore, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot is won by the first special symbol before the second special symbol that is out of swing changes once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, 5000 ms (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time (see FIG. 18B). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the normal gaming state ST1, so that the above-described misconduct (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol in the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probable change game state ST3, the gaming machine can continue the game without reducing the efficiency (rotation rate) of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the probable change game state ST3, 95% of the launched game balls win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is not easily executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the jackpot of the second special symbol which is not substantially the target of variation.

  When the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached in the certain variation game state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the big hit game based on the big hit A, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted). Therefore, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is selected (shifted) with a probability of 34%, and it is possible to play the game with a high probability until winning at least two jackpots again. On the other hand, if the big hit B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal game state ST1 is set after the big hit game (so-called falling).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, the second game is executed with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice in a state where the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed. Two lottery games (or first lottery games) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute the jackpot game twice in a shorter period of time as compared with the normal gaming state, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority.

  Further, by displaying so that the player can understand that the lottery game is executed with a high probability that is advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player can receive at least two jackpots. There is an effect that the user can be made to feel assured and a sense of security can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, if the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, two jackpots cannot be obtained. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, the right lottery game in which the first lottery game is difficult to execute is performed as described above, and the second lottery is performed while the first special symbol is changing for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and a jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily performed) (it does not substantially become a jackpot of the first special symbol). However, there is a case where the first special symbol has a big hit due to the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability changing game state ST2. For example, a case where a big hit occurs in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (1/40 probability). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the big hit A is selected, the game proceeds to the high-probability game state ST2, which is a high-probability game state, so that two big hits can be obtained. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, two jackpots cannot be obtained, and the state is shifted to the low probability state. In this case, 100 time-saving games are provided after the end of the big hit game. As a result, a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged and the desire to play the game is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 by using a winning (start winning) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 as a trigger. , A third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display of a third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is one of the third symbols, in the area Dm Three symbol rows in the (right display area Dm3) are displayed. In addition, the type of the third symbol (whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) displayed in the first display area (Dm) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability game state) and the game state with the certainty-changing support (the certainty-changing game state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the case of the non-playing state (the latent probability changing game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In this embodiment, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched as described above. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the same special symbol may always be displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and a third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of ten types of special symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the game is over.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in a combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) on the pay line, the big hit video is displayed as the big hit.

  Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub-display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on a game state) is displayed. In the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) displayed in the second display area Dn is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the case of the probable change game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the symbol of the treasure box is the second display area as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. Dn. Then, when the change of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is performed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated and displayed in a short cycle (for example, 1 second). . Then, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a winning, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  Further, a third display area Du is formed at the upper left of the first display area Dm. In the third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of “○” and “X” as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the left symbol is a lottery of the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery results of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in other modes. For example, when two types of symbol rows of “O” and “X” are displayed in parallel in two rows, and two “O” symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, a first special symbol or a second special symbol (game (Depending on the state) may be notified. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two types of symbol rows of "O" and "X" are displayed in parallel in the second display area in two rows, and in the certain-variable gaming state ST3, FIGS. ), A treasure box symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn as a third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the game state after the big hit game. Thereby, since the display area of the first display area Dm can be enlarged, the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the change based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no suspension of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub-display area Dt may not be displayed. Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Further, although details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously execute the change between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changing, if one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol during the change is also forcibly performed. The display is configured to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the deviation.

  Here, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds) at the big hit, whereas the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed at the small hit. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). Also, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about three game balls can enter. Further, one round of the small hitting game in the certainty-variable game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the probable change game state ST3, the variable prize device 65 can hardly enter the game ball, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  As described above, even in the probability change game state ST3, when the lottery result indicating the small hit in the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (see FIG. 9). (See (a)). In this case, the deviation change of the second special symbol which is not a substantial fluctuation target which is a long-time (10 minute) fluctuation is stopped, and after the small hitting game of the special figure 1 ends, a new fluctuation of the special figure 1 At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on a new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, a jackpot based on the second special symbol may occur. In the present embodiment, in the event that a jackpot has been won in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the jackpot C (15R sure-change jackpot) that can shift to the high-probability gaming state is always selected (100%). (See FIG. 16 (c)), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the change is started based on a new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn as shown in FIGS. The change of the symbol is displayed, and the change is made so that the change of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. . The variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn in which the change of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged to display the first display in which the change of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

  When the variation of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the first display area Dm, a display mode in which the treasure chest is opened is executed, and when the result of the determination is incorrect, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in the treasure chest, and the player is notified that the lottery result has been lost. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is a win, the character "congratulations" is displayed in the treasure box as shown in FIG. You.

  In this manner, in the probability change game state ST3, when the first special symbol is won in the small hit, the change of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the change of the new second special symbol is started. 2 It is possible to increase the chance that the lottery game is executed. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed, so that the player is expected to win a big hit with the second special symbol. Can be done.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. On the other hand, a second sub-display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. As shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol "black triangle" corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt. In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four each, a maximum of four reserved symbols "black circles" are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. Then, in the second sub-display area Dt, up to four reserved symbols “black triangles” are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as a “black circle” and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as a “black triangle”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Further, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the variation is started from the left side of the display area. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. Naturally, the mouths may be provided so that the lottery results can be changed and displayed at the same time.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, a first starting port switch or a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. Turns on. The first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 have a common guiding path on the back side of the game board 13 for guiding the entered game ball to the first starting port switch. When the first start port switch and the second start port switch are turned on, a jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning ports in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball wins.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the fluctuation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, if a change in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit is started in one special symbol, the special symbol started to change after the other is changed as a forced lottery result. Is configured to be started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is continuously started or the jackpot game is started at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning lottery game is executed on one special symbol, the other lottery game is configured to be forcibly executed on the other side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery game according to the lottery result may be executed so that the big hit game can be started continuously. Further, in the case where a big hit occurs in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. Is also good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined cycle at a predetermined display mode “for example, the letter h”. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

  Further, a special symbol for performing the variable display with priority in each game state may be defined, and the variable display of the special symbol may be performed with priority. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the change of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of execution of the change of the first special symbol. Thus, if the first special symbol does not change, the change of the second special symbol can be executed. However, if the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or Forced stop). Therefore, the change of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal gaming state ST1.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left flow path PA1 through which the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 down the right side of the variable display unit 80 are formed. Below the center of the variable display unit 80, a first starting port 630 is arranged. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured such that 85% of the game balls flowing down enter the second starting port 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow path PA1 is configured to enter the first starting port 630 more easily than the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2.

  A first ordinary symbol starting port 67a is disposed in the right flow path PA2, a variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a, a right first starting port 631 is disposed below the first regular symbol starting port 631, and a second normal symbol starting port 631 is disposed on the right side thereof. The symbol starting port 67b is arranged. Below the right first starting port 631, a second starting port 640 is arranged. On the game board 13, a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged.

  The game ball fired on the right channel is the right ball in the normal state (the state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are upright) by the nail group T4 (configured with three nails). It is configured such that a game ball does not enter the one starting port 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path are configured to flow down the left side of the right first starting port 631. In addition, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (inclination) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (opposite to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is increased, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail T1 and the nail group T4. That is, the rate at which the game balls flow down the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 to the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is reduced, and the game ball flows down the right side of the right first starting port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing balls, it is possible to increase the ratio of gaming balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631.

  The game ball flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (configured with five nails). In addition, the nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is smaller than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass through (width) therebetween. The game ball guided to the nail group T3 is prevented from flowing down below the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (comprised of three nails), and all balls enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. The present invention is not limited to this, and some game balls may naturally flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the setting is such that when a game ball enters the second starting port 640, one prize ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls fired in the right flow path PA2 are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in a normal state), the game balls fired by the player Of these, 85% are refunded as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball by firing the game ball to the right flow path PA2 as compared to firing the game ball to the left flow path. In the present embodiment, a game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first starting port 631 does not win the second starting port 640 due to the nail group T2. Thus, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of game balls entering the second starting port 640, that is, the ratio of payouts as prize balls in right-handed games.

  Next, in the special state (the state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b have been rotated until the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are substantially horizontal, and the open state), the left guiding member 632a causes the left side of the right first starting opening 631 to be moved. Is configured to be closed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), it is configured such that a game ball flowing down the right flow path is prevented from winning in the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h or the probability-changing gaming state ST3, winning in the right first starting port 631 increases, winning in the second starting port 640 decreases, and the first lottery game in the first special symbol is performed. The number of executions (execution frequency) is configured to increase. Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h and the probable change game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is set to be short, so that the game is performed so that the game ball is fired in the right channel. As described above, since the ratio of game balls winning the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol is set high. Furthermore, the small hitting game executed during the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until the opening time of one variable prize device 65 for one round is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time for one round is another time. Is extended more than the small hit in the game state, so that a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of the small hit during the change in the latent probability is set so as to be 15% of the amount consumed by flowing down the right flow path, so that the decrease in the ball possessed by the player is compensated for. Have been. Therefore, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the possessed ball also in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, it is prohibited to play a game in a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is fired in the right flow path PA2), and the second start port is set in the normal game state ST1. When the game ball wins at 640, an abnormal process is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 displays an alarm display “Please play with left-handed” and also issues a similar warning by voice. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, the control may be performed so that the jackpot is invalidated, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

  In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that either left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or may be configured to perform either left-handed game or right-handed game in a specific game state. May be. For example, a starting port of the first special symbol and a starting port of the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, a game ball that flows down the left flow path PA1 by performing a left-handed game and a game ball that flows down the right flow path PA2 by performing a right-play game include a starting port of the first special symbol, What is necessary is just to comprise so that a ball can enter the starting port of a special symbol. This eliminates the need to separate between left-handed and right-handed games in all game states or specific game states, thereby reducing the game burden on the player.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a variation type counter C3 used to select a variation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1600) (see FIG. 45). The updated value is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 and the second start port 640. And a second special symbol holding sphere storage 203b in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and the second starting port 640 is provided with a maximum of four reserved balls. A maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. For this reason, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being played, a game ball is provided to the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 during a period in which a special symbol can be drawn. Is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. . Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and various counter values for variably displaying the second special symbol are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is set to the first starting port 630 or When the winning first opening 631 and the second opening 640 are won, if the number of reserves for the winning opening is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), acquisition of each counter value is performed. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. When the number of reserves for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value and the like are not obtained and a prize ball (in the present embodiment, one game ball) ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and four for the second starting port 640, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the number may be four or the upper limit may not be set.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. It should be noted that the first random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each ball entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is changed to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port. At the timing of winning (start winning) at 640, the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening in the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When the value matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a (in the present embodiment, “7” at the time of low probability and “0 to 9” at the time of high probability), it is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In the first random number counter C1, the number of the random number (hit value) that becomes a big hit is 1 at a low probability, its value “7” is 10 at a high probability, and its value “0 to 9” is The first hit is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of the big hit in the case of a big hit, and is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ), The value is returned to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball is moved to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port. At the timing when the mouth 640 is won (start winning), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening. In addition, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained is actually the timing at which a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch (not shown) or the second starting port switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of order. If so, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is a random number, the variation pattern in the variation display effect is The stop type is the one at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined according to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types dedicated to the second special symbol, as described above. Have been. Each of the jackpots A to E is composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the big hit A, the big hit C, and the big hit D, at the start of the 14th round, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds, and the game ball can pass through the certainty changing switch 65e3. When a game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability change game state ST3 or the latent probability change game state ST2, which is a high-probability game state.

  In addition, the method of making the game ball passable to the probability change switch 65e3 is not limited to the method described above. For example, a V-variable winning device 651 in which a game ball that has entered can pass through a probable change switch 65e3 (provided with a probable change switch 65e3), and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through a probable change switch 65e3 (probable change switch 65e3). Is not provided) and a non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the V-variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high-probability gaming state. The control is performed so that the V-variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed and the non-V-variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. When the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round), the game ball is allowed to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, in the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the V-variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming is changed to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot where it is impossible to shift to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probable change switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that design cost and program capacity can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, at the start of the 14th round, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds. It takes at least 0.5 seconds for the game ball that has won the variable prize device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The game state after the jackpot is not set to the high probability game state. In the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E that are not shifted to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, at the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from passing through the probability changing switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game is started, it is determined whether or not a probability change is given to the player during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability change can be kept for a long time. Further, since the rate at which the probability change is given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation at which the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table A. The jackpot type selection table A is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the jackpot has been won in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the time reduction gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set to jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot). For the jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 33” is set as the judgment value, and for the big hit B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” is set as the judgment value. Is set as One type of the big hit C is set as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” is set as the judgment value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 34% when the big hit occurs in the special figure 1, and the big hit B is selected with a probability of 66%. On the other hand, it is configured such that if a big hit occurs in the special figure 2, the big hit C is selected with a probability of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the big hit A increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol, shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and sets the operating time of the electric accessory 632 to be long. No support status) is provided, and a V winning open pattern in which an open pattern in which a game ball can be awarded is set to the probability changing switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65 is a big hit. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the electric support state is not provided and the V winning open pattern is not set. The big hit C is set to a big hit in which an electric support state is given and a V winning opening pattern is set.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1, only the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (fluctuated). Also, it is configured such that the latent probability changing game state ST2 is not given, and a problem that at least two big hits are illegally given in the high-probability game state can be suppressed.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table B. This jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot A and the jackpot E are set as the jackpot types of the special figure 1, and the jackpot C and the jackpot D are set as the jackpot types of the special figure 2, respectively.

  The big hit E is a 15-round time-saving big hit, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the big hit game ends. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. It should be noted that when shifting to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set longer, so that the big hit is the first change of the first special symbol which has shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2. Is generally considered. In this case, the jackpot E, which is not selected in the normal gaming state ST1, is set so as to be selected instead of the jackpot B in order to rescue the player. Accordingly, discouragement of the player can be suppressed, and a problem that the desire to play the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

  In the case of the big hit in the special map 2, the big hit C and the big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is constituted by a jackpot in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, the possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high-probability game state until at least two jackpot games are executed is set high. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set to a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot C in which the probability change game state ST3 is set.

  In the big hit type selection table B, the big hit C is set with a judgment value of “0 to 65”, and the big hit D is set with a judgment value of “66 to 99”. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is hit, and the jackpot D is set to be selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the big hit D is selected when the big hit is made with the second special symbol during the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probable change gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The rate at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (judgment values “0 to 33”), and the rate at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (judgment values “34 to 99”). ).

  In this manner, when the probability changing game state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, so that the latent certainty changing game state ST2 is set, and the player has at least 2 It is configured such that the high-probability game state is easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the electric accessory 632 is easily set to the special state (open state) (electric support). ), The number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the game state changes to the probable change game state ST3, 3000 ms is usually selected at a rate of 191/199 and 30,000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, it is configured such that a variation time of 30,000 ms having a long variation time is selected with a low probability.

  Until the change time of 30000 ms elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state). During that time, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls enter the ball), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probable change game state ST3, in the case of a deviation, as shown in FIG. 18B, the fluctuation time of 1800000 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even in a state where the reserved ball is stored. However, during the probability change game state ST3, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 (see FIG. 15 (b)). The variation executed in the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the variation of the stored ball stored next is started. In other words, by winning a small hit in the first special symbol, the chance of a lottery in the second special symbol increases, so that a lottery advantageous to the player is easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game in expectation of winning the small hit with the first special symbol, and can increase the expectation of the player other than the big hit. In addition, the lottery probability of the small hit may be appropriately set to an appropriate value.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198).

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is placed in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be acquired at the timing of starting variation. Naturally, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 may be configured to be selected at the start of the change.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18A and 18B, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. A variation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), and a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probable variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (see FIG. b)) are respectively set.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the type of variation pattern is set in accordance with the number of reserved balls when the variation is started, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the result of the success / failure determination. The type of the variation pattern determined by main controller 110 is a rough content of the variation pattern, and the variation time and the approximate variation type (non-reach, reach various) are mainly determined. The sound lamp control device 114 is configured to determine the details of the variation pattern in more detail. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal gaming state ST <b> 1, the result of the determination as to whether the second special symbol fluctuates is incorrect, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Have been. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. The business hours of the game store are generally long even from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, which are longer fluctuation times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large hit from being played in the second special symbol in the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, in this embodiment, even in the case of a big hit, a long fluctuation time is set. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the amusement shop can monitor an illegal game and provide guidance on a correct game method.

  In the present embodiment, a long fluctuation time is also used in the second special symbol in the case of a hit, but a short fluctuation time such as 500 ms may be used in the case of a hit. With this configuration, an extremely long hit change is executed in the second special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the hit change is not executed in the first special symbol during that time.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is configured to be 180000 ms, and is set to be extremely long. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is one hit, is set to 500 ms and is set to be short. With such a configuration, even when the first special symbol of the first change becomes the jackpot E after the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is difficult to recognize that the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be executed continuously, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the certain variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol deviating is set to 180000 ms, which is set to be extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time per hit is 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which an effect of a treasure box described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display that is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured not to change at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the configuration, the fluctuation display time that is the big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol is changed. The variation time that becomes a symbol jackpot may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to postpone the jackpot in the second special symbol in which the jackpot B, which is a disadvantageous type for the player, may be determined, and during the second special symbol, The big hit can be given to the player by making a big hit with a symbol. In this case, when a big hit is started with one special symbol, a lottery game changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With such a configuration, the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous type for the player, is determined immediately after the jackpot C is given and the probability change game state ST3 is set, and the probability change game state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Defects can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display in which the hit / failure determination result is the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously fluctuated and displayed, the hit / failure determination result in the first special symbol is out of fluctuation. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of hitting the hit / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed), and the number of lotteries in the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In the case where the number of time savings is set to be a period until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and displays 100 times, the fluctuating time of the first special symbol is continuously changed 100 times due to the second special symbol coming off. By configuring the second special symbol to be longer than the time when the variable display is performed, it is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is displayed during the time reduction game.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has passed the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. Then, the value of the random number which is the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is equal to the winning random number set by the second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 15C), it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol.

  Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is performed, and the ball is set to the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a (through gate) or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b ( (Through gate). The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5 to 9”. In the high probability gaming state, the number is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the game has been won. In the high probability gaming state, the acquired second random number counter is acquired. When the value of C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and a symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is displayed. In the normal gaming state ST1, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b of 632 perform an opening operation once for a predetermined time (1.2s in the present embodiment), and in the high-probability gaming state for a predetermined time (this execution). In the embodiment, the opening operation of 1 s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, each of the counters based on the retained balls is displayed in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c without displaying the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol). If the value is not stored, a random number value is obtained from the second random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Also, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment). Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of holdings (ordinary symbol holdings 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol based on the random number value is stopped or the hold is exhausted. If the data has been shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to ON. The determination as to whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed based on which of the reserved areas or the ordinary symbol of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured such that various common counter values are selected. However, the first lottery game (the first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. For the game (second special symbol), various dedicated counters are set respectively, and the update timing and the initial value of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game are changed, thereby updating with different values. Of course, it may be constituted by a counter value obtained.

  By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is obtained at the same opportunity, it is possible to obtain a different counter value, It is possible to suppress a fluctuation pattern selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a problem that the determination result of the correctness is synchronized.

  Further, even if the variation patterns are selected from the common variation pattern tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e. , A normal symbol holding ball counter 203f, a probability change flag 203g, a probability change setting flag 203h, a probability change pass counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, a notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variable flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, medium time saving counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, prefetch reserved ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time reduction flag 203a2, At least it has a Rieria 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning the first starting port 630 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the gaming balls winning the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Storage area.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of the winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the MPU 201 reads the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer in the same manner as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 201 executes the first process described above in order to execute a process such as a jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning. The data is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c stores the second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the detection of the winning start of the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Normally, a symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, a normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing (starting prize) to the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b is used for the digestion of the reserved area where the data is empty. Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earliest order.

  In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol hitting lottery is performed. And a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes a process such as a winning lottery or a display setting of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88. Of the data corresponding to each winning start (the value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball. Shift to the ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are first activated detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of balls to be held (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, and the first special symbol holding ball number is determined. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is set in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 640. Is stored, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S203) or the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S206), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or a second ordinary symbol starting port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, second symbol display, These are counters for counting the number of retained balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to four times. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and held, and a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. When the value of the second hit counter C4 is shifted to the next reserved area (the reserved area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by reducing the reserved number by one), the reserved area before the shift is performed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the ordinary symbol flag (not shown) of the shifted and stored holding area is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the high probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3), and when it is OFF, the low probability game state (including the time reduction game state ST1h). ). In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 or the probability varying gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability varying switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is set to off based on the fact that the probability change flag 203g is set to on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probability change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to be officially set to ON and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the certainty switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a certainty variable passage counter 203i described later has a value greater than zero. With this configuration, it is possible to judge whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h in a state where the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the game store. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the gaming balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed and updated (S1681 in FIG. 50). In addition, after performing the process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, it is incremented by one and updated (S1673 in FIG. 50). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the number-of-discharges counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, at the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 14th round, and at the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to 0.5 based on the start of the 14th round. Set on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 14th round for the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the big hit B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the processing of S1679 of the winning processing (S1632 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, it is updated by being subtracted by one. Also, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65e3 according to the type of big hit.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this embodiment, a voice saying “look at the liquid crystal”) to attract the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have elapsed). The notification counter 203m is updated by decrementing by one by the process of S1664 of the notification process (S1631 in FIG. 49) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound.

  With such a configuration, the voice "look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, in the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the “attention” character, which is a notification that prompts the player to look at the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. Is displayed. In the 14th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, and when the operation is watched by the player, the type of the jackpot being executed is determined. The movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6 (a)) is made less visible to the player in order to keep the player expecting that the probability change game state ST3 is provided until the end of the jackpot game. Information announcement is being performed. However, when the thirteenth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval. Is performed. Thereby, after the interval effect is executed, the player can be attracted to the displayed content displayed, and the player can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to be shown so as to divert the player's attention from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By notifying the device 65 that the player's hand is held, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by informing the player to look at the decorative lamp 34 and the like. Furthermore, during the 13th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to notify the user of reading with a mobile phone, thereby distracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the effect of distracting the attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thus, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, or the jackpot E is determined based on the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game ball in the variable winning device 65 has elapsed. It is a counter of.

  The remaining ball timer 203o determines the time required for the variable prize device 65 to discharge the game ball that has won the prize when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance to the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match (FIG. 6). S1707 in FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game balls are left illegally in the variable winning device 65, and a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the 14th round so that the game balls reach the switching member 65h earlier than the actual game. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the injustice of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the certain change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the certain change switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be turned on. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper assignment of the probable change game state ST3.

  The probability change valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the certain variation enable flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched to the certain variation switch 65e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, this indicates that the game ball passes through the certainty change switch 65e3 during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time from when the above-described probable change valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203r turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even after passing through the probability change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not to pass.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the player can enter the special discharge port 65e2 and pass a game ball through the positive change switch 65h, or play a game with a piano wire or the like from below the positive change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a sphere and passing the ball, or erroneously detecting a magnetic sensor as passing by a radio wave.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won the variable prize device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The time reduction counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time reduction gaming state ST1h. If the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game, 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203t. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state ST3 is not set after the big hit game, the game shifts to the 100 time saving game state ST1h.

  The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on winning in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640 is a hit at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised by the flag which can identify which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and the big hit flag 203u is set to “10” for the first special symbol, the big hit flag 203u is set to “01” for the second special symbol, and "00" sets the big hit flag 203u to off.

  Here, since the big hit flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, at the start of the change, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. In this case, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the loss. Thus, it is possible to perform processing so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not simultaneously execute the variable display that causes a big hit.

  In other words, when the variable display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the variable display that becomes a big hit is not started on the other hand, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured with the common jackpot flag 203u. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set with independent jackpot flags. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to simultaneously execute the variable display of the big hit. By adopting such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display of the big hit B and the big hit E is started in the first special symbol during the probability changing game state ST3, the changing time is set long, and the second special is set. By configuring so that a lottery can be easily selected with a short fluctuation time in a symbol, it is possible to easily configure the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect of notifying the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probable change game state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot in the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect to play a game in order to win. Therefore, a fresh effect can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the big hit game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is being changed and displayed. This is set to ON in S1004 of a second special symbol change stop process (S207 in FIG. 36), which will be described later, which is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the big hit of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In S605 of a first special symbol change stop process (S204 in FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In the process of S1011 of the second special symbol change stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The pre-reading reserved storage area 203x stores discrimination results such as the hit / failed judgment result for the reserved ball stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the jackpot type, the variation type, and the like. Is a storage area to be stored.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the result of the determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is lost). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y does not become a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The time-saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special-design time-saving state (electric support state, normal symbol high-probability game state). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (electric support state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is normally in the special symbol. Indicates a state (normal symbol low probability state). The time saving flag 203a2 has an initial value set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot type with the power support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next big hit game is started. 29 (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36) or when the number of special symbol lotteries in the time saving (electric support) state has reached a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large open-port solenoid for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric accessory. A MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the displayed held symbols are rearranged and displayed in the order of starting the variable display.

  Further, a vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning in the starting port is an important factor in determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning from being intentionally performed in the winning port. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been given to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. The variation pattern selection table 222a includes a plurality of types of variation content (for example, variation) corresponding to the variation time and the rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents of reach A to D having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 change start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 change start flag 223f. , At least a special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, an effect counter 223j, a dependent state setting area 223k, and another memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (a first area to a fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, performs a variable effect (fluctuation) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Display), which is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main control device 110, when the number of retained balls of the variable display is added due to a ball entering first starting port 630 or right first starting port 631, or in main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the first special symbol retained after storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d is configured to output the number of retaining balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c based on the retaining ball number command output from the main control device 110. Since the only difference is that they are stored in the memory, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when a first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h, the current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is depressed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)) (see FIG. 3). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 in the event that the error occurs. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol and various lotteries such as selection of a winning or a variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery to determine whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed by sub-control. Since the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device performs the control, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered with a box called a board box, which is made up of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is caulked with a member called a "sealing member" for preventing fraud so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member. By closing the base member and the lid member, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless a method of leaving an opening mark such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member is performed. I have.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to be able to simultaneously perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the seven seven-segment LEDs of the seven-segment display 37b, the left seven-segment LED performs a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right seven-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b. Then, a through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In this manner, control is performed so that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can simultaneously perform variable display or stop display in a display mode indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S201). When it is determined that the big hit is being made (S201: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not being performed (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol change display is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol change stop process (S204), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed, the process of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Is done. In the first special symbol change stop process (S204), the second special symbol is stopped and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is changed and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the change of the first special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol variation start process (S203), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the selection of the variation pattern based on the retained data are performed. The processing is executed. In the first special symbol change start process (S203), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The first special symbol change start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when the second special symbol is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the first special symbol during the variation display when the variation is stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the interruption ( What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the variable display of the 1st special symbol (temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  After the first special symbol change start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being changed and displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), a second special symbol change stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol change stop process (S207) will be described later in detail, but, like the first special symbol change stop process (S204), when the specified change time of the second special symbol during the change display has elapsed. Then, a process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. A process for forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the second special symbol change stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (S205: No), the second special symbol change start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination or a variation pattern selection based on the retained data is performed. The processing is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thus, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the second special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is changed to a variable display. The second special symbol change start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when the first special symbol is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol during the variation display when the variation is stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the interruption ( What is necessary is just to perform the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol (temporarily stopped).

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S203), which is one of the special symbol change processes (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S203 in FIG. 24), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). . A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S305 in FIG. 24) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). A jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the hit determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the counter value based on each counter value.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S203 in FIG. 23), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305 in FIG. 25), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probable changing game state ST3 (probable changing) (S402). The determination as to whether or not the gaming state is the certainty-variable gaming state ST3 is made based on whether or not the certainty-variable flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is ON (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (probable change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (not probable) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) ), It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that a change to a big hit or a small hit has started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using the big hit flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be used at the same time. It is configured so that some variation is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a large hit (or a small hit) occurs continuously in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large. In the case where the change to be a big hit or a small hit has been started in the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed (the processing from S402 to S404 is skipped), and the first special symbol is skipped. Variation display based on deviation (special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (the processes from S402 to S404) can be skipped, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the change to the big hit or the small hit has not started in the second special symbol (S405: No) ), It is determined whether or not the lottery result executed in the processing of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set to a big hit (S408), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to the value of the big hit type counter C1. It is set based on the gaming state (S409). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order. In this case (S406: No), special figure 1 deviation variation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 departure variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. However, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviated, setting of a deviated symbol is performed.

  As described above, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually obtained is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to ON, that is, When the change to be a big hit or a small hit is started by the 2 special symbols, the setting of forcibly removing is executed in the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the change of the big hit (or the small hit) is not executed at the same time, and the big hit (or the small hit) is continuously made in a short period. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation is started and the damage on the game store side is excessively increased. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by executing the big hit (or the small hit) simultaneously or continuously.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the change that causes a big hit is not performed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the changes are performed simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the big hit game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, and the special symbol fluctuates in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable that a temporary stop is provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation change processing (S410) which is one processing of the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is ON (S412: Yes), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to the first special symbol display device 37 (S416). After that, this processing ends. As described above, when the big hit or the small hit is set in the second special symbol, the first special symbol is forcibly set to the off symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously subjected to a large hit or a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit. (S412) based on the gaming state and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B). In the process of S412, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), since the lottery result is out of order, the process of S416 is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S412 that the small hit is made (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414), and a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (FIG. 25, S305), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 25).

  In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current game state (the normal game state ST1, the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability changing game state ST3, A variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S504 (S505). After that, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is performed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is ON (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the process of S512 is completed, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set fluctuation pattern selection table, a deviation pattern is selected based on the result of determination (out) or the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 (S515). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S516). After that, this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506 in FIG. 28), the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a status command indicating the current gaming status is set (S507). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S204).

  In the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Is determined (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the processing of S603 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the big hit game based on the selected big hit type is set (S605). Thereafter, the time reduction counter 203t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S606), and the time reduction flag 203a2 is set to off (S607). Next, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol displayed in the variable manner on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is on. It is determined (S610). If it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203y is off (S610: No), the present processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is ON (S610 in FIG. 29), it means that the second special symbol has been stopped at the big hit or the small hit, and In order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, the processing of S611 and S612 is executed. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to off, and the process shifts to the process of S612.

  In S612, special figure 1 departure stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a deviated manner is executed. In the processing of S602 described above, when it is determined that the big hit flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an out-of-position manner. A one-off stop process is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 ends, the present processing ends.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed. The process of stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and changed at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is displayed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) (S610: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). May be.

  Here, the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612). In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). After that, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, and thus S622. The processing of S624 is skipped from and processing shifts to the processing of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter 203t has a value greater than 0 (S625). In the process of S625, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203t is greater than 0 (S625: Yes), the time reduction counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S626), and the subtracted time reduction counter 203t is set to 0. Is determined (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time-saving time counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), the time-saving gaming state ST1h ends, and the time-saving flag 203a2 is set to OFF (S628). The process proceeds to S629.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S627, when it is determined that the reduced time saving medium counter 203t is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627: No), the time saving gaming state ST1h is continued, so the processing of S628 is performed. Skip to step S629.

  In the process of S629, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of stopping the change of the first special symbol, which is dynamically displayed (dynamically displayed), on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). After that, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S608), this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped according to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the processing for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is fluctuated and stopped according to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Forced execution. Thereby, the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

  In addition, in the case where a change to be a big hit or a small hit has already started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly deviated as a result of the right or wrong determination. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the big hit and the small hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling property becomes too high.

  Next, a second special symbol change start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol change process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 31, S206), the number of first special symbol reserved balls of each process from S301 to S306 is different from the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203). The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306). In each of the processes from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except for the point that they are respectively changed, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S206 in FIG. 23), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol big hit determination process (S705).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The point that the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the corresponding processing of S808 and the processing of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processing of S409 and S410 are the first. They differ from each other in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted. Similarly, the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 32) is also the above-described special figure 1 deviation variation processing (see FIG. 26). Since the same processing as that described above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol change pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the processing of S901 corresponding to the processing of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each of the processes of S906 to S907 corresponding to the above processes, the special pattern 1 variation pattern command (the variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104). FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S207). The second special symbol change stop process (S207) differs from the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, the point that “for special figure 1” is changed to “for the special figure 2”, and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, the special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1004 corresponding to the processing of S604, In the processing of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the processing of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S1011 corresponding to S611, the special figure 1 departure stop processing is specially described. 2 in that it is changed to the departure stop processing. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Also, the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1011 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36) is similarly the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing as that described above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description is omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is simultaneously performed. Can be done. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other one is used. Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to stop display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a description will be given of the start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won any of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol up to the upper limit number (the maximum number of each of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is four). This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a hit / failed determination result, a selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 38) will be described.

  In the start winning processing (S105 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, which is the first starting port (S1101). Here, a winning in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 (the start winning has been achieved) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. It is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than the upper limit value of four for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A suspended ball count command for notifying the suspended number to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1105). Each value of the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. (S1106).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39. However, the result of the hit / fail determination and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , A process of determining a stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, with respect to each of the processes from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631) executed in each of the processes from S1101 to S1107 is performed. The only difference is that the same processing as the processing performed in the second starting port 640 is different from the processing performed in the second starting port 640, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a description will be given of the first prefetching process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, a random number counter per first C1 and a type counter per first C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the empty area of the prefetch pending storage area 203x in the area having the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read-ahead pre-pending storage area 203x, the result of the rejection determination is determined. It should be noted that the result of the determination of success or failure determined here is determined in a case where a hit is made in the normal game state ST1. Since the fluctuation time is set by being variable depending on the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the game state at the start of the fluctuation cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, the determination result of the success / failure determination can be accurately determined only when the value of the first random number counter C1 having the common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state. Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal game state ST1.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and a first winning command indicating the big hit type is set. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1123 that the winning / failing determination result is out (S1123: No), a first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set (S1125). . After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port (the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631) and is newly held and stored, the information stored and held is Based on this, the result of the determination is determined before the start of the change, and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the normal color) based on the result of the determination of whether the ball is reserved or stored, An effect of displaying a notice symbol or the like and suggesting a result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the hit / fail determination is determined as the normal game state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a second prefetching process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

  The second prefetching process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the fact that the first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107) has won the first starting port (the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the pending data and performing various determinations, the process of pre-reading the pending data based on the winning of the second starting port 640 and performing various determinations is performed. Since the same processing is executed only for the difference, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed. When one of the special symbols is subjected to a variable display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed with a variable display of a missing. Therefore, in the first prefetching process or the second prefetching process described above, when prefetching the lottery result, it may be configured to determine whether the lottery result is forcibly removed. To do so, for example, when prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol, a period (time) during which the dynamic display of the prefetched lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, during the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a change to be a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. If the lottery result is out of order, the lottery will be out of the state of execution of the second special symbol, so that the determination may not be made. Thereby, the processing load caused by performing the above-described determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The hit during the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 to when the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 632 is being performed. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in the variable display (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed ( S1222). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time that is set in advance by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221 to be described later before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  In the processing of S1222, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). . In the processing of S1223, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S1213, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S1218, an “X” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, and a stop display (lighting) is performed. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S1223, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is changed to the second symbol in the display mode set in the processes of S1213 and S1218. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the two symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1224). If it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is a win (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is out of this time (S1224: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the ordinary symbol is not in the variable display mode (S1202: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable symbol is suspended in the ordinary symbol M) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is turned on, that is, whether or not the time saving game state ST1h or the probable change game state ST3 is established (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability time (FIG. 15C). A success / failure determination result is obtained (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1209). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for high probability time (FIG. 15C). Is obtained based on the result (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, the symbol is off) (S1212: No), a display mode of “X” which is a display mode at the time of off is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is determined to be a win (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of “○” which is the display mode at the time of the hit is determined. This is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the time-saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time-saving game state ST1h or the probable change game state ST3 (S1214). In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the processing of S1216, the opening time of the guiding members (the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, when it is determined that the big hit game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being played (that is, the game is in the low-probability game state) (S1215: Yes), The opening time of the blade is set to 0.2 s, and the number of times of opening is set to one (S1217).

  It is determined whether the gaming state is during the time-saving gaming state ST1h (including the probable changing gaming state ST3) (S1219). If it is determined that the time is reduced (S1219: Yes), the change time of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) acquires the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2, and the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202f (FIG. 19) is determined (S1220). After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the general figure is determined based on the value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2 from the general pattern variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each game state. Except for the probability variation game state ST3 (probability variation: with power support), there is only one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general-purpose variation type counter CS2. On the other hand, when the game state is the probable change game state ST3, the determination value “0 to 190” determines the variation time of 3000 ms, and the determination value “191 to 198” determines the variation time of 30,000 ms.

  As a result, in the probable change game state ST3, a fluctuation time longer than other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When the long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the electric accessory 632, and when the electric accessory 632 operates, the second starting port 640 can be won by the left guiding member 632 a. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, during that time, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is configured to be restricted.

  Here, as described above, if the long variation time (30000 ms) is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so the right-handed game is performed during that time. About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the certain variation game state ST3, it is possible to increase the number of winnings to the second starting port 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability change game state ST3, the big hit D is always selected when a win is made with the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the big hit with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probability change game state ST3, it can be more advantageous to the player when a lottery is made with the second special symbol than when the lottery is made with the first special symbol when a big hit is made. Therefore, by increasing the winning in the second starting port 640 during the certainty-variable game state ST3, it is possible to provide a period that is advantageous to the player.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and determines whether the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when a game ball has passed.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302). . In the processing of S1302, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), the right-handed game is executed in spite of the normal gaming state. The notification command shown is set, and the flow shifts to the process of S1304. When a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, the present process may be terminated as it is, and the normal symbol lottery may not be performed.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is obtained (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1305).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free holding areas (normal symbol holding 1 to normal symbol holding 4) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 suspends the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S1401). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1512.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1512 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1513, S1514).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1513, S1514) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1513, S1514) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interruption is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, the main processing (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). In this main process (S1600), roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (S1600 in FIG. 45), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each of the sub-sides. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). After the processing of S1253 is performed, a probable change setting processing is performed (S1254). The probability change setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. However, when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has been hit and a ball has been hit, a process of setting data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set to the surely changing game state ST3 in the post-big hit state setting area is executed.

  When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, a jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The details of the jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operations of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device 83 Thus, the variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory 632 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1256, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1251. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (S1600 in FIG. 45), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) and the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). Then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot effect or the variable is performed. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 632 attached to the right first starting port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first symbol variation update process is performed according to the variation pattern. The changed display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. The variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) in steps S306 and S310. ) Is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41). ).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1609). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and the processes from S1601 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1609: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1608, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1601. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1601 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S1501). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). The jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific prize winning is performed. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large open mouth) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 29) or S1006 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 36) or S624 of the special figure 1 departure stop process (see FIG. 30). The processing of S1024 of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and if the start of the special pattern big hit or small hit is set, the special pattern big hit or small hit is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and the process ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and thereafter, the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B). In this case, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, if a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and if a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left hit game, it is necessary to switch to a right hit game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit occurs in a left-handed game, a sufficient time for switching to a right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the middle of the big hit or the small hit (S1623). During the special symbol jackpot or small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1623, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1623: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is during the big hit or the small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), a big hit operation setting process is executed (S1625). The big hit operation setting process (S1625) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47. Open setting to the variable winning device 65 and the positive change solenoid in each round corresponding to the big hit type is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625), which is one of the processes of the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably changing solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1641. After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be terminated halfway. Defects can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hitting game, the operation of the positive change solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for one second.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k (S1626). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is performed (S1630). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1630 in FIG. 48). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S1652). If it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability change setting flag 203h is ON (S1652), the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S1653), and the flow shifts to the process of S1654. Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203g being set to on.

  In the process of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the type with the electric support (jackpot C) (S1654). In the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is the type with the electric power support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1654 that the jackpot type is not the type with the electric power support (jackpot C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1652 that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1656). If it is determined in the process of S1656 that the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1656: Yes), 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203t (S1657), the process of S1655 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1656 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the probable change switch 65e3 and set a high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game. It is possible to play a game with an interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the certainty change switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1629, when it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is performed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification processing (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1631).

  In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is a value greater than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the thirteenth round (S1632). The determination of the end timing of the thirteenth round is made in the thirteenth round depending on whether 10 balls have been won or when 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that the end timing of the thirteenth round has been reached (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to two seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1632, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), the process ends. Here, the counter of 2 seconds is set in S1633, so that the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 13th round, and the sound of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the big hit game, expecting the certain change game state ST3 to be given.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but is not limited thereto. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by subtracting -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is performed, a winning process is performed (S1632). Here, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1632).

  In the winning processing (S1632 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1671). The round valid period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1671: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has passed (S1672: Yes), the winning counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

  In the processing of S1674, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). After that, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball has been thrown since the door 203n was closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1674 that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

  In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting -1 (S1679). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the certainty change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the certain-variable passing switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the certain-variable passing counter 203i (S1681). The probable change setting flag 203h is set on (S1682). After that, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1680 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the processing of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1684). The probable change valid flag 203p is set on (S1685). After that, this processing ends. Here, by setting the probability change valid flag 203p to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability change game is performed. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1678 that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether or not the probable change valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the certainty change valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change enable flag 203p is ON (S1686: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the probability change enable timer 203r (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1688: Yes), the probable change valid flag 203p is set to off (S1689). The probable change valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1690). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1688 that the probable change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the processing of S1680 is executed.

  Accordingly, if the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the time of ball ejection. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 and the probability change game state ST3 is improperly given.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1632 in FIG. 50) is performed, an abnormal process is performed (S1633). After that, this processing ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1633) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormal processing (S1633). In the abnormal process (S1633), a process of monitoring whether the probable change switch 65e3 has been illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality processing (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1701). If it is out of the round validity period (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is added and updated (S1703). After that, the processing of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

  In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1704: Yes), since the ball is being thrown out, the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1705). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) matches the number of winning pieces (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined whether it is (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). After that, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game balls in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the certainty change switch 65e3 even in the case of the big hit B.

  In the processing of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the certainty passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1711), and thereafter, this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 114>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S2116 (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when receiving the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S2113 in FIG. 53), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2116 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off processing in S2116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S2116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2116, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2116 (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2116 is executed. Therefore, the process in S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes of steps S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to the process of S2008 is performed via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the previous process of S2101 (S2101). If the above has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S2102 to S2110, which is processing relating to display (staging), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2111 and the variable display setting processing in S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Upon completion of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing, a lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the processing shifts to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of the command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Upon completion of the process in S2112, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off processing is executed (S2116). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S2117). In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S2111) will be described.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 54, S2111), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 change pattern command is a command for changing and displaying the first special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 1 change pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), a special figure 1 change start process is executed to change and display the first special symbol (S2202). The special figure 1 change start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55. However, the setting required to change and display the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is described. Is executed.

  Here, the special figure 1 change start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 change start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the change pattern type is determined from the received special figure 1 change pattern command. It is extracted (S2242). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the later-described variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112). This is used to set a first special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

  When the process of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without a certain power transformation support) (S2243). If it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2243: No), this processing is ended. When it is determined that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2243: Yes), the lottery result of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to start the fluctuation is a fluctuation that becomes a big hit E (15R normal big hit: electric support 100 times). It is determined whether it is (S2244). If it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in the jackpot E (S2244: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change is the jackpot E (S2244: Yes), the character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). After that, this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is reached, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time is set long and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol disadvantageous to the player is set short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that mainly executes the game is set to be long. Thereby, when the player shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the player strikes right and performs a game such that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start changing simultaneously. Here, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probable change) is always given when a big hit occurs, but in the first special symbol, when a large hit occurs, a normal probability game (low probability game). May be provided by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the first special symbol is a big hit and a big hit A (15R sure change big hit: no electric support) is given, the change started in the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E. Then, the game immediately shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  As described above, normally, the third symbol display is performed based on the fact that the change to the big hit E is started in the first special symbol after the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the game is mainly performed in the second special symbol. On the device 81, a chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time-saving gaming state ST1h or the surely changing gaming state ST3) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (a notification mode indicating that the game state is the latently variable game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the big hit game twice. Until is executed, it is recognized that the high-probability gaming state (probable change) is maintained (highly likely). However, in the chance zone, the player cannot be convinced (high expectation) that the probability change game state ST3 will be given even after the next big hit, and may be in the time saving game state ST1h (low probability state). The game will be played while recognizing.

  Therefore, for example, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, if the first change of the first special symbol is a change that causes the jackpot E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 2 change pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 change start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 change start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, the details of the special figure 2 change start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 change start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 change start process (S2204), first, a special figure 2 change start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the change pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 change pattern command (S2301). S2302). The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the later-described variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112). This is used when setting a variation pattern command for display of a second special symbol to notify the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

  When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a certain-variable gaming state ST3 (a gaming state with a reliable power-supply support) (S2203). If the game state is other than the certainty-variable game state ST3 (S2303: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the probable changing gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol to start changing is a big hit (S2304). Here, the discrimination is executed by discriminating whether or not the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a big hit fluctuation pattern.

  In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304: Yes), a treasure box-based notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2305). . On the other hand, when the result of determination is incorrect, a treasure-box-off notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2306).

  Here, the treasure box pertinent announcement effect command is a command for instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the probable change game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is a symbol of a treasure box, and is a display mode shown in FIG. 9A and a display mode shown in FIG. 9B. Are repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), so that it can be displayed as if blinking.

  Here, when the certain variation game state ST3 is set, if the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is correct is out, the long off variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected. Therefore, the frequency at which the change of the second special symbol is started becomes extremely small. However, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the change of the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the change, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The fluctuation of the second special symbol with respect to the reserved ball is started. In this case, the player expects that a change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol in which a bigger jackpot more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily selected.

  When the change of the second special symbol is started, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the treasure chest representing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed in the first display area Dm. . On the other hand, a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode in which the treasure box vibrates for about 2 seconds, if the treasure box is opened and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is notified that a big hit has occurred in the second special symbol. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probability change game state ST3 of “Continuation of chance!” Is continuously executed is displayed.

  Note that, in the case where the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot of the special figure 2 is reached in the probability change game state ST3 (that is, in the case where the game is shifted to the latent probability change game state ST2), the latent probability change is performed. It is only necessary to display a notification mode (for example, a character "entering heaven zone!") Indicating that the game state shifts to the gaming state ST2. In this case, a notification mode for instructing to stop firing of the game ball, such as "Please stop firing!", Should also be displayed. Here, the instruction to stop firing is mainly executed in the first special symbol in the certain odd game state ST3, but is mainly executed in the second special symbol in the latent certain odd game state ST2. Is set to Therefore, since a game ball enters the right first starting port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it is a trigger for performing a lottery which is disadvantageous for the player. By giving the instruction, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), a display in which a treasure box is opened is executed in the same manner as when the result of determination is a jackpot. The character "Sorry" indicating that the determination result is out of order is displayed. Thereafter, when 5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. Is done.

  Thereby, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and thereafter, Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game can be easily understood, and the player can play the game in a comfortable manner.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 change start process (S2204), the process is terminated. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2205). When it is determined that the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), a stop type command receiving process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception processing (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception processing (S2206). In the stop type command receiving process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). From the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, the stop type (big hit A to big hit E, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the audio lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The type of stop is stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type is the jackpot A (15R sure-change jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type is the jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is reserved 1 (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the earliest digestion order area). ) Is determined to be a jackpot E (15 rounds regular jackpot: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the big hit random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a big hit type selection table 202d (FIG. 15A). 16 (a) to 16 (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main control device 110. The result of the determination as to whether or not the vehicle is in the probable change state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the character "Chance Zone Entry" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game. The display command to be instructed is set in the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the big hit E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the game goes to the heaven zone (the latent probability changing game state ST2) when the big hit game ends. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character of “entering the heaven zone!” Indicating the shift is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability changing game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, when the character of the heaven zone is displayed, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been guaranteed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game, expecting the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the hold 1 of the first special symbol in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time-saving gaming state ST1h or The character "Chance zone rush!" Indicating that the game is in the probable change game state ST3 is displayed, so the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has occurred at least twice, and the time-saving game state ST1h. The game can be played by recognizing that the game state is the certain change game state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game has shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2, and it is possible to suppress discouragement of shifting to the time saving game state ST1h in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception processing (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main control device 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (i.e., the number of balls retained in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol retained in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is determined by the sound lamp. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640. Every time there is a winning start, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2207. The values can be adjusted to the values of the reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol retaining ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), a winning command process is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured to be able to identify the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is configured to be able to determine the holding order (the number of balls to be held) and the result of the hit / fail determination in the normal game state ST1. ing. Further, it is constituted by a command capable of discriminating the values of various counters obtained at the time of starting winning.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability is not changing) (S2402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223 has the probability changing jackpot information. Is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no information on the jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S2405 without executing the processes of S2403 and S2404. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is information on the jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), the information lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process in S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of S2405, other processing is executed (S2405), and the winning command processing ends.

  Next, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (the counter in the range of 0 to 198) is the determination value (any of “0 to 50” in the present embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying characters "Please stop firing!" For notifying the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball is set to the display control device 114 (S2503), and this processing is performed. To end.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, when receiving the winning information that is the probability change jackpot, that is, the jackpot A, the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the player of stopping the firing. Here, when shifting from the normal gaming state ST1 to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game in the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is a substantial variation target). ). However, when the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, when the hold of winning the jackpot A in the normal game state ST1 is stored as in the present embodiment, the notification for stopping the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and winning in the first starting port 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can be notified of the jackpot A at an early stage by being notified of the stop of the firing, and can diversify the effect of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the launch stop notification of the game ball is executed by lottery, but it may be configured to always notify when the holding ball of the jackpot A is stored.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command processing (S2210 in FIG. 58), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S2211: Yes), a status command reception process (S2212) is executed. Details of the status command reception processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S2212).

  In the state command receiving process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). The determination as to whether the gaming state has been changed is performed by comparing the information on the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k with the received gaming state. When it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the time reduction gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the time reduction gaming state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. The display command instructing the display control device 114 is set as described above. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character of the "lower bound zone" indicating the normal gaming state ST1 is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). After that, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal gaming state ST1 (S2602: No), the gaming state is changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without a certain power transformation support). Is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the latently variable game state ST2 (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latently variable game state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. Display command to be set. Also, a setting is made such that a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. You.

  Next, from the winning information storage area 223b, it is determined from the winning information storage area 223b whether the hold 1 of the first special symbol stores the hold information for determining the jackpot E (S2607). If the hold information in which the hold 1 of the special map 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the character indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display command to be set is set (S2608). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying a character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). . After that, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, the big hit E occurs immediately after the transition to the latent probability change state ST2, and when the transition to the time saving game state ST1h, the display indicating the heaven zone can be prevented from being performed. Excessive discouragement can be prevented (suppressed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the game state has been shifted to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with the probability change support) The main display area setting command corresponding to (state) is set in the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (in this embodiment, a treasure chest symbol (FIG. 9A) (See (b))) is set as a display command that instructs the display control device 114 to display.

  Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. In the processing of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). After that, this processing ends.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command receiving process (S2212), it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. The command is set (S2215), and the process ends. By the process of S2214, for example, a notification sound indicating a firing abnormality ("Please hit left!") Based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through gate passing process (see FIG. 42). Is output). In addition, in the process of S2215, for example, a display indicating a firing abnormality is displayed based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through-gate passing process (see FIG. 42) ("Please hit left!" Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), a process according to another command is executed (S2219), and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) includes the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of S2705 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated by acquiring from 223z (S2703). In addition, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that the command corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates the second special symbol. It is configured to show that

  The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol set in the processing of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control unit 114. The display control device 114 receives the first special symbol display variation pattern command, and receives the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decreased by 1 (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S2705: No), the state that the special figure 2 change pattern command is not received from the main control device 110 is set. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 change start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the change pattern in the change display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 change pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The display variation pattern command of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Is transmitted to the control unit 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol, and receives a special variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In response to the setting of the display, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decreased by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to on (that is, are off) (S2709: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). If the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 displays the stop type (either a 15R probability variable jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot) based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 informs the display control device 114 of the stop type (either the 15R certain variable hit or the 15R normal hit) based on the stop type. ) Is generated (S2712). Note that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the type of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Is done. If the determination result is a miss, a miss symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

  With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed. Can be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the transition of the game state, the player switches the special symbol for setting a long variation time with the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the player can play the game. It is configured to control the special symbols that can be used. Then, in the latent probability change state ST2, only the big hit that becomes the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set so as to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the big hit. Even after the jackpot has been executed, the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 or the probability varying gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the game proceeds to the latently variable probability game state ST2, it is possible to set so that the variable probability state is set until at least two big hits are executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that two big hits are guaranteed in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the electric accessory 632 is not operated, 85% of the right-hitting game balls enter the second starting port 640. Further, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is set so that a small hit is won in the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the right-hitting game balls are given to the player as small prize balls as prize balls. Is set with the probability of being paid out at Therefore, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set to be low (non-electric support state), and even if the game is a latently variable game, the game is performed in a state in which the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed in the case of right-handed game. be able to.

  Further, if the second special symbol wins from the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game shifts to the probability changing game state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when the first special symbol hits a jackpot, either a jackpot that shifts to the probability change game state ST3 again or a jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in expectation of being able to obtain two jackpots again. Further, by providing a case where the game state is shifted from the certainty-variable game state ST3 to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from becoming too high. In the probability changing game state ST3, a transition to either the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the normal game state ST1 may be made by a jackpot based on the first special symbol. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will shift from the probability-variable game state ST3 to the latent probability-variable game state ST2 in which two jackpots can be obtained again, thereby improving the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when a large hit is made with the first special symbol for mainly playing a game, the lottery rate of the big hit A to which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery rate of the big hit B. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty for shifting to the latent probability changing game state ST2, thereby suppressing an increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the game state is configured to be switched. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the game state may be switched according to the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the game state is switched by configuring the small hits to be more easily drawn than the large hits. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to the advantageous gaming state by winning a small hit, and it is possible to expect the player to win the small hit. Further, even when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to switch to a game state disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, thereby suppressing gambling.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 in an enlarged manner.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in front view, and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is located in the right area of the game board 13 in front view. , A point that the lower right decorative member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a second normal electric accessory 640 a is attached to the second starting port 640 and the game board 13 is viewed from the front. Side, a point in which the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a first symbol opening 67a and a second symbol opening 67b instead of the ordinary symbol opening 67b. (A gate) 670 is provided below the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the point that the right first starting port 631 is removed is different. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like in addition to the first embodiment. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. In the following, mainly with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a configuration of the game board 13 added to the first embodiment.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a through gate 670 is provided. The through gate 670 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When a game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the passing of the game ball to the through gate 670, a determination is made as to whether or not it is an ordinary symbol hit.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2). After the symbols “X” are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “の” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit).

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, three seconds). The second ordinary electric combination 640 a is maintained in an upright state so as to regulate the entry of game balls into the second starting port 640 during normal operation (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric combination is provided. By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next ordinary symbol (second symbol) is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640, a win / non-judgment determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not a big hit is made, and a big hit type determination is made. Also do. The jackpot types will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 74. The jackpot types determined here include eight types of jackpots A to H as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). The eight types of jackpots are used to determine whether the interval time is short or long (1 second or 4 seconds), whether or not the V operation is possible, and whether or not there is an electric support after the end of the jackpot game. Are set in combination with each other.

  Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is sent to the first variable winning device 65 provided with the special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) having the certainty changing switch 65e3 at a predetermined timing (the certainty changing switch). This is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not it is possible (easy or difficult) to guide at a timing that allows passage through 65e3.

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, an interval time between specific rounds during a jackpot game (a round in which the second variable winning device 650 performs an opening / closing operation (a round in this embodiment) 4R) and the timing at which the game ball reaches the first variable prize device 65 by changing the round (interval time provided between the first variable prize device 65 and the round in which the first variable prize device 65 performs the opening / closing operation (5R in the present embodiment)). And whether or not the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 at the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). ) Can be set.

  Whether or not the V operation is possible is determined as to whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If the V operation is allowed, the game ball set in the first variable prize device 65 is set so as to be able to pass through the probable change switch 65e3. On the other hand, the V operation is disabled. In this case, the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 is set to be impossible (difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. The detailed contents are the same as in the above-described first embodiment, and therefore description thereof is omitted. In the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. Is controlled so that whether or not the V operation can be performed can be set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is possible is set by controlling the driving of the switching member 65h. However, any device can be used as long as it can set whether or not the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3. On the upstream side of the passage having the probable change winning switch 65e3, a lid member that is constantly driven to open and close at a constant interval is provided, and a stopper member for retaining game balls is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, only when the timing when the stopper member is released and the timing when the lid member is opened coincide with each other, a configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the positive change winning switch 65e3. By using such a configuration, it is possible for the player to know that the lid member is regularly opened, and the player is allowed to win a game ball in the first specific winning opening 65. Then, it can be assumed that there is a possibility of passing through the probability changing switch 65e3, and there is an effect that the willingness of the game can be increased.

  Further, the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is changed to make it difficult for the game balls to win in the first variable winning device 65, thereby enabling the game to be played. It may be possible to set whether or not the ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  The presence or absence of the electric support sets whether or not to transition to a state (electric support state) where the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a is easily operated in the special state after the end of the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, eight types of jackpots A to H are set as the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the same manner as the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are arranged as variable prize devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided below the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in a specific round (fifth round in the present embodiment) during the jackpot game, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period ( It is operated so as to be released until a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter the ball (29 seconds in this embodiment) (see FIG. 80 (b)).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided above the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and rounds other than the specific round during the jackpot game (first to fourth rounds and sixth to seventh rounds in the present embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guiding path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball fired by a right-handed game is mounted on the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guiding path forming member 70 has an opening 70a which is an opening through which a game ball fired by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides for guiding the game ball passing through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and game balls flowing down third guide member 70d And a discharge unit 70e from which the is discharged is assembled as one unit.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a positional relationship between a position where the game ball passes (a position of the opening 70a and the discharge unit 70e) and a member (each guide member) for guiding the game ball is shifted. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress the problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is shifted, and it is possible to increase the manufacturing efficiency in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 including the first variable winning device 65 is mounted on the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guiding member (fourth guiding surface) 71a that receives a game ball rolled on the third guiding member 70d of the ball guiding path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, The decorative portion 71b is assembled as one unit.

  In addition, the decoration part 71b is provided with a decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it is possible to emphasize that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the big hit game. Have been. Specifically, the surface of the decorative portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is constituted by a half mirror, and when the decorative lamp is turned off, the inside of the first variable winning device becomes difficult to recognize, and the first identification is performed. When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decorative lamp is turned on and the inside of the first variable winning device is made visible.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the player is in the gaming state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and not playing the game or the normal gaming state (during the big hit game). In a non-playing state, the player cannot see (difficult) the structure in the first variable prize device 65. Is inserted, and the switching member is deformed, etc.).

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. The ball guide path 72 is formed in the right area of the game board 13 by the above-described ball guide area forming member 70 and the fourth guide member 71a. The ball guiding path 72 is configured so that a game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right region of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guiding path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined downward and to the right when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the first guide member 70b. The lower end of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

  The second guiding member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guiding member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball flowing down the second guide member 70c falls on the third guide member 70d.

  The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the game ball that has flowed down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharging portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guiding member 71a. Fall.

  The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when the game board is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ). The downstream end of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state, the fourth guiding is performed. The game ball flowing down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening / closing door 65f1, and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the through gate 670 and the second starting port 640 are arranged). Be composed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game balls meander. Therefore, the time required for the game balls to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guidance path passing time) is determined by the meandering. It can be set longer than in the case where it is not performed.

  Further, each guiding member constituting the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the inclination angle is gradually reduced from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set at about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set at about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set at about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and to open and close the fourth guiding member 71a, and thus the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

  Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, a plurality of game balls can be won in a short period of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, between each guide member, since the game ball is configured to fall on an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction, it is possible to efficiently reduce the flow-down speed of the game ball. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, in order to allow a plurality of game balls to simultaneously stay (roll) on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is reduced and the flow speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material (urethane or the like) having a high coefficient of friction may be attached to the rolling surface of the game ball of the guide member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. The guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. May be. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from being generated between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71 formed separately from the ball guiding path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guiding path configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guiding member 71a Only by changing the shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guiding path forming member 70 can be used. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the above-described ball guiding path 72 is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open). In an operated state), the game ball cannot pass through the opening 70a (difficult).

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, a period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game is set. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guiding path 72 can be moved to the first variable prize device at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable prize device 65. It is configured to be able to control whether or not to win 65.

  In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths along which the game balls flow), whereby the upper variable winning device (the second variable winning device) is provided. The configuration is such that the time required for a game ball that has passed without winning the prize device 650) to reach the lower variable prize device (first variable prize device 65) is delayed. Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided therebetween.

  Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 therebetween may be assembled as one unit. With such a configuration, the assembling work to the game board 13 can be facilitated, and the production efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the game balls meander in the left and right direction of the game board is used as the ball guidance route 72, but if the configuration is such that the time during which the game balls pass through the ball guidance route 72 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, Other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the path is meandering in the depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13 in a front view, or a configuration in which the game ball is three-dimensionally meandered using both the left-right direction and the depth direction may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the time that the game ball passes through the right area of the game board 13 (the time that the ball flows from the second variable prize device 650 to the first variable prize device 65) is the distance that the game ball flows. Is extended to a predetermined time or longer by using a configuration for extending the game ball or a configuration for delaying the speed at which the game ball flows down, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulation member that regulates the flow of a game ball is provided in the ball guidance path 72, and the regulation member is constantly or electrically driven at regular intervals to reduce the time that the game ball passes through the ball guidance path 72. It may be configured to be longer than a predetermined time. By using the electrically driven restricting member as described above, it is possible to more reliably make the time to pass through the ball guiding path equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

  Although the second embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball is difficult to win in the first starting port 630 during a right-handed game, the first starting port is provided in the right region of the game board 13 as in the above-described first embodiment. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the number of times the electric support is provided in the probable game state ST3 is limited (100 times), and a flow in which various game states are set. Are different. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the transition rate of the high-probability game state or the low-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the special symbol type (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (the normal gaming state). The first embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by a combination of ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability changing game state ST2, and probability changing game state ST3. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is aimed at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a substantial variation target. Specifically, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol game is from 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds). The time is selected, and 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). With this configuration, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change at the same time in the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol ends one change. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (at least 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

  Then, during the normal gaming state ST1, when the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit, a big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and a big hit D (7R normal big hit: electric support available) ), Jackpot E (7R probability variable jackpot: with electricity support) and jackpot H (7R regular hit: no electricity support) are selected.

  Here, in the case where the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high-probability game state (the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the probability changing game state ST3) after the jackpot is set to 50%. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the first lottery game wins the big hits B, D, and H, after the big hit game ends. In the case where the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability changing gaming state ST3 is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to the high probability unless the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state ST3 is not set, and the probability change game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. It shifts to the time-saving gaming state ST1h (low probability: with electricity support) in which the probability is low.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game is performed based on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game state to be shifted after the end may be different, but when describing the flow of setting the various game states, the game state that can be shifted by the jackpot type (the game state is shifted by performing the game normally) (Game state) will be described as a transition destination after the end of the big hit game.

  In the normal game state ST1, if the second lottery game is performed, it is set so that the game does not shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game ends, but shifts to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally performed during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, a description will be given of a probable change game state ST3 in which a transition is made at a probability of 50% when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1. In the certain change game state ST3, a right-handed game aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. During the probable change game state ST3, the second special symbol is a substantial fluctuation target. Specifically, in the probable change game state ST3, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game, It is configured such that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it becomes possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the probability change game state ST3, when a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and a jackpot F (7R: high probability: Either "No electricity support" or "Big hit G" (7R: Low probability: With electricity support) is selected.

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability change game state ST3, the probability of transition to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set to 70% after the end of the jackpot. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 30%. When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the big hit G is won in the second lottery game, the time-saving game state ST1h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the electric support is ended when the total number of changes in the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability change game state ST3 reaches 100. Therefore, when the special symbol change exceeds 100 times in the probability changing game state ST3, the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In addition, if the first lottery game is performed in the probability changing game state ST3, the rate of transition to the high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to 10%, and the rate of transition to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, a description will be given of the latent probability changing game state ST2 which shifts at 10% of the time when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability changing game state ST3. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, a right-handed game aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is a substantial variation target. Specifically, in the latent probability varying game state ST2, a variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. It is configured such that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the latent probability changing game state ST2, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot E (7R: high probability: electric support) and a jackpot F (7R: high probability) : No power support).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability change game state ST3, the probability of transition to the high probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set to 100% after the end of the jackpot. It is set so that it does not shift to the low probability state (the normal gaming state ST1 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h), and if the big lottery E is won in the second lottery game, after the big hitting game is over, the certain changing game state is set. When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, the time-saving gaming state ST1h will be described. In the time-saving gaming state ST1h, a left-hitting game aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the center of the gaming board 13 is performed. During the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is substantially changed. In the time saving game state ST1h, a variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game. It is configured that 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol (see FIG. 77). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a jackpot A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and a jackpot C (7R: low probability: One of the jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electricity support) and the jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electricity support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of transition to the high-probability game state (the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the probability changing game state ST3) is set to 95% after the end of the jackpot. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the first lottery game wins the big hits A and C, after the big hit game ends, the normal When the gaming state ST1 is set and the big lottery E is won in the first lottery game, the probability change game state ST3 is set after the big lottery game ends, and when the big lottery F is won in the first lottery game, after the big lottery game ends. , The latent probability changing game state ST2 is set.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the electric support is provided, and in the gaming state in which the second ordinary electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 tends to be in the special state. However, as described above, during the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is a substantial variation target, and since the variation of the second special symbol is a long variation, the second starting port is provided during the time saving game state ST1h. A game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 has one prize ball of the game ball set, even if the right starting game is performed during the time saving game state ST1h, the second starting port 640 plays a game ball. The number of payouts does not increase. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the same game as the normal gaming state ST1 (left-handed gaming) is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, main game characteristics (transition of various game states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. I do.

  First, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, and the game is aimed at the certain-variable gaming state ST3 (allocation 50%). Next, in the probability changing game state ST3, the player wins the jackpot F and aims at the latent game state ST2 (distribution 10%) while performing the second lottery game. Alternatively, a special symbol game is performed 100 times without causing a big hit, and the electronic support is ended to shift to the latent game state ST2.

  In the probability changing game state ST3, the jackpot in which the probability changing game state ST3 is set again after the end of the jackpot game occupies 60% of the entire jackpot, so that the latent probability changing game state ST2 is obtained while acquiring the payout by the jackpot. The goal is to move.

  In addition, the probability changing game state ST3 is configured such that a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second lottery game, and the small hit game is performed so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the big hit in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the big hit game occupies 90% of the entire big hit. This latent probability changing game state ST2 is a game state in which the present pachinko machine 10 can expect the most payouts. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 80, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is configured to be able to acquire more payouts than the probability changing game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hitting game. . That is, during the latent probability changing game state ST2, the number of payouts can be increased in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a probability of 90% after the big hit game ends. It is configured.

  In the latent probability changing game state ST2, the high probability gaming state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining probability 10% is won instead of 90% looping the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability is changed. It only moves to the gaming state ST3. That is, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, at least two times (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h) are configured to be able to win the jackpot in the high-probability game state.

  Finally, the time-saving gaming state ST1h is a gaming state set when the state transitions (falls) from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is a predetermined number of times (100 in the present embodiment). ) Is a gaming state in which electric support is provided. In this time-saving gaming state ST1, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the big hit is set higher than in the normal gaming state, and if the first lottery game is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving gaming state ST1, the high The rate of transition to the stochastic game state is set to 95% (the probability change game state ST3 is 70% and the latent game state ST2 is 25%). Then, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol exceeds 100, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time-saving gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3). Since it is configured such that a plurality of ratios to shift to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set, and furthermore, it is configured such that a special symbol to be substantially fluctuated according to the gaming state can be changed, the normal gaming state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not substantially the target of variation is performed, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state can be extremely reduced (0% in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Further, the substantially variable target of the latent probability changing game state ST2 which is a high probability gaming state is a second lottery game in which the second special symbol fluctuates, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. In such a case, the game is shifted to the high-probability gaming state by 100%. Therefore, in a part of the high-probability gaming state, it is possible to attain a jackpot at least twice in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with rich gaming properties, and it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation control of various devices, the description of the same operation control as that of the first embodiment is omitted, and the other operation control will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, when a jackpot game is started, various devices (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) related to the jackpot game are operated a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 80). Then, based on the various commands output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed. ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed or when a predetermined number of prizes (10 in this embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is defined as one open period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in the present embodiment) in one big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is always in the open state during the opening period t2. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The upper attacker 650b may be operated to repeat the state. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the opening period t2 is set when either a predetermined period elapses after the second specific winning opening is first opened or a predetermined number of winning conditions are satisfied. It will end.

  Then, after the end of one round, the next round is started after a lapse of a predetermined period t3 (interval period). As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device is opened from the first round to the fourth round, and five rounds are performed. In the eyes, a game is executed in which the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

  Next, the flow between the fourth and fifth rounds in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round, can be changed according to the game state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period set to 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period set to 4 seconds.

  Here, the effect on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball fired by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, and then guides the ball. By passing through the route 72, the first specific winning opening 65a can be awarded (see FIG. 64). The ball guiding path 72 is designed such that the ball guiding path passage time is 3 to 4 seconds.

  In addition, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 at the same time as the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (the attacker 65b is turned on) (V The opening operation is controlled to be ON), and the mode (the state in which the V opening operation is ON) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after a predetermined period (V opening period) t5 has elapsed, the game is performed. The ball is controlled so as to operate in such a manner that it is impossible (difficult) for the ball to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (the V opening operation is off).

  That is, during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, V is obtained by adding the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 during which the V opening operation is on. The validity period t6 needs to be longer than the ball guide route passage period (in this embodiment, the maximum is 4 seconds). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6 obtained by adding the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V release period t5 (2 seconds) is set to 6 seconds, and the ball guidance is performed. Make it longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guidance route 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance route 72 becomes V-effective. It is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the V effective period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance route passage period, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a within the V effective period t6. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game that can substantially pass through V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. It is possible to provide a jackpot game in which V passing is impossible (difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that is not possible (difficult) are set), and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to be set.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the above-described first embodiment, an operation pattern in which the game ball can pass (easily) the probability change switch 65e3 and an operation pattern that does not allow the game ball to pass. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an unpassable (difficult) operation pattern.

  Specifically, first, when a round (five rounds in the present embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for two seconds. That is, when a game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the switching member 65h is set so that the game ball can pass (easily) pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Drive. Then, the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is set to the first specific winning opening 65a. An opening / closing door opening pattern in which a game ball cannot be won (difficult) (for example, an opening pattern in which opening of 0.4 seconds is repeated five times from the start of the fifth round, and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) can be changed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the operation pattern in which the game ball can pass (easily) pass the probability changing switch 65e3 by simply changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of ratios of the jackpot game that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, and to provide a variety of playability to the player and to improve the interest of the game. .

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state in which game balls can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a case where game balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). When the configuration that allows the setting of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the timing at which the driving of the switching member 65 is started, The operation may be controlled such that a constant operation is repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state where a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). By using a configuration that allows setting of the switching member 65h, it is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on longer than 2 seconds. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can more reliably pass through the probable change switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable prize device 65 within the V validity period. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

  With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate multiple times in one round. (The first specific winning opening 65a is configured to repeat the open state and the closed state within one round), and the game ball which wins when the specific winning opening 65a first becomes the open state switches the probability changing switch 65e3. It is good to be able to pass. Further, the opening / closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is constituted by a plurality of members each performing a predetermined movement different from each other, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation. The mouth may be configured to be open.

  By using the above-described specific configuration, even when a jackpot game in which the opening period t1 is short (a jackpot game in which a game ball cannot pass (is difficult) a passing game through the probability change switch 65e3) is set to the open state (within one round). Since the game ball wins the specific winning opening in the (second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (fifth round is completed) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the elapse of the interval period t3 (second time). The specific winning opening 650a is open). Thereafter, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the big hit game is played. finish.

  While the big hit game is being played, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display corresponding to the big hit game. Specifically, at the beginning of the jackpot game, an effect display (effect A) is performed to congratulate that the jackpot game has become a jackpot game, and after that, it is notified that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched, and the jackpot is played. After the end of the game, an effect display (effect B) for notifying (suggesting) that a game for determining whether to shift to the high-probability game state is performed is executed. Then, an effect display (effect C) is performed to inspire whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state, and at the end of the jackpot game, a game state provided after the end of the jackpot game (high or low of the jackpot probability, presence or absence of electric support). Is effected (effect D) for informing (suggesting).

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is different from (delayed) the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

  Further, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched between the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing at which the fourth round ends) and the timing at which the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing at which the fifth round starts). Is set in the interval period (specific interval period t4), the game ball is set to the probability change switch 65e3 in the current jackpot game based on the timing at which the player switches the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a jackpot that can be passed, and it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game due to grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

  A plurality of timings at which the effect display is switched are prepared within the specific interval period t4, and a means for randomly setting the timing at which the effect display is switched is provided. This can make it difficult to grasp the result.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, although the description on the display screen or the description thereof is omitted for the same portions as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment, the same applies to the present embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state ST1, a stage where the hero is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the game state shifts to the certainty-changing game state ST3, a display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the probable change game state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68 (a), the change of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the change of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen. On the lower side of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which a "tower search mode (probable change game state ST3)" which is the current game mode (game state) and "right-handed" for informing the game method are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, a situation display area is provided in which an object imitating a tower currently being searched by the hero is displayed. In this state display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the uppermost floor, "rooftop" above the uppermost floor, and "30F" which indicates the current floor number are displayed. Have been.

  During the probable change game state ST3, the display is updated for each change so that the tower goes up one floor each time the special symbol changes once, and reaches the rooftop when the special symbol changes 100 times without winning the big hit. That is, the number of floors ("30F" in this figure) displayed with a cursor as "current floor" is the same value as the current number of special symbol changes after the end of the big hit. By displaying the status display area, the special symbol is fluctuated 100 times without winning the jackpot during the probability change game state ST3, and the state of shifting to the latent probability change game state ST2 is described by the hero ascending the tower and finally the rooftop. Is configured to be displayed as an effect that reaches.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display contents when a jackpot is won during the probability change game state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen indicating that a jackpot has been won during the probability change game state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555" to indicate that the result of the lottery is a big hit. In addition, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at "246" indicating that it has come off. In the status display area, “50F” is shown as the current floor number (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous big hit).

  In the certainty-changing game state ST3, when a jackpot is won, a display (elevator) notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, an effect is performed in which the user gets into the elevator and fuels the destination of the elevator (not shown). The destinations of the elevators are "outdoors" when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the time reduction gaming state ST1h, and "tower search mode (tower) when the gaming state is set to the probable changing gaming state ST3. 1F) ", and" roof mode "(see FIG. 69) when set to the latent probability changing game state ST2, each of which is configured to indicate the destination by an effect executed during the jackpot game. I have.

  In the present embodiment, since the game state set after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on whether the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started before the jackpot game starts or in the early stage of the jackpot game. The game state set after the game is over has not been determined.

  Therefore, based on the won jackpot types (A to H), it is determined whether the gaming state shifts when the game ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 and the game state shifts when the game ball does not pass (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of the jackpot E, the gaming state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is the probable change gaming state ST3 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h), and the effect common to the discrimination result is used as the effect of the early stage of the jackpot game (for example, the effect A in FIG. 67). Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and to set an effect at the end of the game (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With such a configuration, the effect on the display screen can be displayed without discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result as to whether or not the game ball has passed the positive change switch 65e3).

  FIG. 69 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game state display area displays the right-handed display and the current game mode (game state). A certain “roof mode (latent probability changing game state ST2)” is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the hero has reached the rooftop.

  This "rooftop mode" is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the present pachinko machine 10, various values are set such that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a payout is the latently variable gaming state ST2. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80, but in the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the substantial variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. In addition, the small hitting game time (the opening period and the ending time during which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening in the small hitting game time) is also set to be short (shorter than the probable change game state ST3). That is, the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set to the gaming state in which the time during which the first specific winning opening 65a is open in the small hitting game per unit time is the longest among all gaming states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  To the “roof mode” that indicates the latent probability changing game state ST2, the jackpot F is won during the probability changing game state ST3 (10% of the entire jackpot), or the jackpot is not won during the probability changing game state ST3. It is designed to shift by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At that time, as an effect display performed by the third symbol display device 81, for example, a win (FIG. 68 (b)) is won during the probability change game state ST3, and an effect (not shown) to get into the elevator is started. Then, during the jackpot game, is the elevator rising to the upper floor or lowering to the lower floor? After informing the player of which mode to shift to after the big hit game is finished, the effect display in which the elevator reaches the roof is executed.

  Also, in the case of shifting to the latent stochastic game state ST2 without winning a jackpot during the stochastic game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. The current floor number shown in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the “rooftop mode”, the cursor shown in the status display area shifts from “100F” to “rooftop” and shifts to the “rooftop mode”.

  Next, a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the “roof mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the rightward display and the current game mode (game mode) are displayed in the game state display area. ), Which is a “roof mode (latent probability changing game state ST2)”. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the hero has reached the rooftop.

  On the upper side of the display screen, “G possession (acquisition medium display)” is displayed as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. In the center of the display screen, a plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower. This treasure box is produced and displayed so as to be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  On the acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen, a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in the flow of a series of games in the pachinko machine 10 (flow from initial jackpot to transition to the normal game state ST1) is performed. Things.

  In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during a series of games is displayed as an acquisition medium display. For example, during a series of games, a value corresponding to a medium acquired in a big hit game is displayed. The value and the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hitting game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify the value. With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. When such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium obtainable in one big hit game), another The display mode may be displayed. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that a medium equivalent to the big hit game has been obtained as a result of the plurality of small hit games.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which has been changing at the same timing as the stop of the change of the second special symbol, is forcibly stopped and displayed at an outlier. At the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box opens, and an effect in which a treasure indicating a small hit appears from inside is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2. When a big hit is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure chests displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70A is opened during the change, and an effect in which a monster appears from the treasure chest is displayed. Then, a battle with the monster starts during the big hit, and an effect is displayed (not shown) so that the game state after the big hit game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle. For example, if a battle is won, the player reaches the rooftop and shifts to the “rooftop mode”. In addition, when fleeing from the battle, a transition is made to the “tower search mode (1F)”, and when the battle is lost, an effect is displayed so as to proceed to the “outdoor” stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, an effect in which the story progresses for each mode corresponding to the game state is displayed, and the story is displayed in accordance with the special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit). The result is configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the present state is advantageous for the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the playability (which is more complicated than the conventional pachinko machine 10) Even if it adopts a game property that can obtain many game balls other than the jackpot game, there is an effect that the player can play the game without being confused.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Other points are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) operate. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and that the values of various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first hit random number table 202a differs from the first embodiment in that the value set as the big hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit determination condition is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the first embodiment in that the jackpot types are increased so that jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot can be selected, and the jackpot type selection used in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The difference is that a table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e and the ordinary figure variation pattern selection table differ from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when small hits are stabilized in the small hit random number table 202b, and is a table in which a small hit type corresponding to each game state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special electric auditors product operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the set big hit type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected in the event of a jackpot, and stores the timing and the number of the accessory operation during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 of FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors' (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table The difference is that 202h has been added and that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables have been changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85). In the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). , A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  If the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 in the big hit control processing 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the ending processing 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86). Cleared when resetting the jackpot scenario.

  The other memory area 203z includes the other memory area set in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and includes at least the number-of-balls counter 203j and the operation counter 203k described in the first embodiment. , A notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, and a remaining ball timer 203o, which are used in the same control as in the above-described first embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. In the low-probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", In the gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7 to 9”, it is determined that the first winning (big hit) is. That is, the probability of a big hit in the low-probability gaming state is “1/200”, and the probability of a big hit in the high-probability gaming state is “3/200”. In addition, in the first lottery game using the first special symbol and the second lottery game using the second special symbol used in the present embodiment, the hit determination is performed using the first random number table 202a.

  With reference to FIG. 73 (b), the contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) does not win a small hit. On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “10” in the low-probability game state (low accuracy: no power support, low accuracy: power support). If it is "-20", it is determined to be a small hit, and in the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy: no power support, high accuracy: power support), the value of the first random number counter C1 is "10-199". If there is, it is determined that it is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is “0/200”, the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is “11/200”, and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. Is "190/200".

  Thereby, in the high-probability game state in which the second lottery game is performed (the latent probability change game state ST2 and the probability change game state ST3), the small hit game is frequently given. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), in the latent probability changing game state ST2 and the probability changing game state ST3, the time when the second specific winning opening 650 is open as the small hit game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as the small hitting game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter in the small hitting game in the latent probability changing game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3, and the player can acquire game balls other than the big hit game. It is possible to provide a game machine with unexpected surprises, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery in the low-probability game state. Although the probability of winning a small hit in a game is set to “11/200”, it may be set to, for example, the same probability as the second lottery game in the high-probability game state.

  The contents of the second hit random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in a range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to “0 to 98” in the low-probability game state. In the high-probability gaming state, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second win (per ordinary drawing). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is “99/100”, and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is “100/100”. Note that, when a winning is made per ordinary figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is activated, and a state where a game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 (special state) is established. In the present embodiment, the probability of the second hit is slightly different between the high probability and the low probability, but may be the same probability.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability change game state ST3. It is the schematic diagram which showed the selection table B202d typically. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing game state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referred to in the time reduction game state ST1h. It is a type selection table D202d.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery of each special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol). Based on the 1 special symbol (special figure 1) or the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2. A is selected from any of A to H.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h is added, and the selected jackpot type is It is different in that it has increased, that the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and that the ratio of the first hit type counter value distributed to each jackpot type has been changed. Are the same. The description of the same portions will be omitted, and differences will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state ST1, the ratio of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming to the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy) is determined. The interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) are set for each jackpot type so that the probability of being in the low probability state (low probability) is 50% at 50%. , The presence or absence of the electric support after the big hit game is set. More specifically, an open pattern (V possible) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) a V-action as the V-motion according to the game state, and the game ball is switched to the probability-change switch 65e3. Any of the open patterns (V impossible) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h is set to impossible (difficult) passing (entering the ball).

  Furthermore, if the V operation is V possible according to the game state as the interval time, the game ball is passed to the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability changing switch 65e3. Even if "4 seconds (V is possible)" in which the specific winning opening 65a can be won, and even if the V operation is "V", the game ball is passed through the probable change switch 65e3 during the period in which the game ball can pass (enter). In the first specific winning opening 65 of the one variable winning device 65, any one of "1 second (V impossible)" that cannot be won (difficult) is set.

  Then, it is set whether or not the electric support (100 times) is given after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the electric support is provided regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enters) the probability changing switch 65e3. When the jackpot type in which "Yes" is set is selected, when the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, the game proceeds to the probability change game state (ST3) after the end of the jackpot game, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability change switch 65e3. If the ball does not pass (enter the ball), the game shifts to the time-saving game state (ST1h) after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, the current big hit type is selected from the big hit types set with different contents by the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, when the big hit is won in the special map 1 during the normal gaming state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the big hit type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state ST3 is provided after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot B, a jackpot D, and a jackpot H are set as the jackpot types in which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game ends. This is because even if “1 second” or “4 seconds” is selected as the interval time and “V possible” or “V impossible” is selected as the V operation, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the big hit game. It indicates that there is a possibility. With this configuration, it is not possible to grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game (it becomes difficult) only by grasping the contents of the interval time and the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the end of the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game). There is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in the effect display and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the assignments in which the V operation is “V possible” and “V impossible” differ only depending on the type of the special symbol, and are set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the ratio of the V operation being “V OK” is set to 90% and the ratio of being “V impossible” is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, the V operation is set to “V OK”. Is set to 100%, and the ratio of "V impossible" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (the operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the game state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) is reduced. (There can be two types). This has the effect.

  Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method advantageous to the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state is set. A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, during the normal game state ST1, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is reset so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set. By receiving a plurality of lotteries in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the game shifts to the most probable latent probability changing game state ST2 for the player without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Action is possible. Assuming a case where such a game is performed, if a big hit is won in the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is selected. The big hit H is a big hit type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the big hit game ends.

  Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who performs an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. It should be noted that the penalty (penal rule) to be performed on the inappropriate player may be other than the above-described content. For example, during the normal game state ST1, the small hit is won in the second special symbol which is not substantially the target of variation. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hitting game may be set as a special variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which at least the first special symbol has a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is substantially difficult to continue the game, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which an inappropriate game is continuously executed.

  In addition, if a jackpot is won as a result of an inappropriate game, the operation contents of the special electric auditorium during the jackpot game will be changed to the special operation contents (a game ball that cannot enter the specific winning opening (difficult). The contents may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main control device 110 in advance.

  In addition, for example, when a jackpot is won in a state where the second special symbol is retained and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends, the inappropriate game described above is executed without the player's intention. In some cases, the game may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit storage number of the second special symbol (four)) after the end of the jackpot game, or the second start port 640 during the normal game state ST1. May be executed only when winning. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) a penalty (penal rule) for an inappropriate game from being given to a player who is playing a normal game, and to give a player dissatisfaction. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability change game state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probable change game state ST3, the ratio of the game state after the jackpot game ends to the high-probability game state (high accuracy) is determined. At 10%, the probability of a low probability state (low probability) is set to 90%. This is because a penalty is imposed on the player because the game of the special figure 1 in the probable change game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game is changed to the high probability game state (high accuracy) is 70%, and the rate of the low probability state (low accuracy) is 30%. It is set to be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing game state ST2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability game state (high accuracy). Is set to 30%, and the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty (penal rule) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game is high probability game state (high accuracy) is 90%, and the rate of low probability state (low accuracy) is 10%. It is set to be.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the ratio of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming to the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy) is determined. At 95%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game ends is high probability game state (high accuracy) is 5%, and the rate of low probability state (low accuracy) is 95%. It is set to be. This is because the game of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore, a penalty (penal rule) is given to the player.

  As described above, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, even if the low probability state is the same, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game has a higher probability than the normal gaming state ST1. It is set so that it can shift to the gaming state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the low-probability state (falls down), it is possible to provide a chance (return chance) to shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined period. There is an effect that the motivation of the player to play the game can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio to the high-probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, respectively. This makes it possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets tired early. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has performed an inappropriate game.

  Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the variation time set in each variation pattern is different. The description of the same portions will be omitted, and only different points will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes), which is different from the first embodiment described above. In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so that the fluctuation time is set short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In the time-saving gaming state ST1h, as in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the variation time of various out-of-position variation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is substantially changed, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is set to 500 ms. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has been changed.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the certain variation game state ST3. The certain variation game state ST3 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a general figure fluctuation pattern selection table for selecting a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of types of ordinary symbols is one, and is different in that there is only one type of ordinary symbols referring to this table.

  FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80 (a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used when a small hit is determined as a result of the special symbol game winning / failing determination, and a predetermined small hit is selected according to the game state. Is set. When the small game is won in the small game state during the normal game state ST1 or the time saving game state ST1h, the small game 1 is selected. When the small game is won in the game state ST3, the small game 2 is selected. If the small hit is won during the gaming state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. The small hits 1, the small hits 2, and the small hits 3 are different in the operation of the special electric auditors during the small hitting game. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the operation details of the special electric auditors (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) activated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 80 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special electric auditors product operation table 202h. The contents of operation of the special electric accessory corresponding to the big hit type are set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

  First, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from the jackpot type A to the jackpot E, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, the opening operation during the round is the second variable prize device from the first round (R) to the fourth round. 650 (upper) is opened for 29 seconds, and in the fifth round, the first variable winning device 65 (lower) is opened for 29 seconds. Then, from the sixth round to the seventh round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to be opened again for 29 seconds. Note that the opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, and during this time, the specific winning opening is set to be closed when 10 game balls win in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device. Then, 2 seconds are set as the interval between rounds, 1 second is set as the specific interval between rounds (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds are set as the ending time.

  The jackpot types E to H differ from the jackpots A to E in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for other items. . In this way, by making the specific intervals between rounds different from each other, it is possible to set whether or not (easy or difficult) whether the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 as described with reference to FIG. I have. As described above, between the specific rounds (the round in which the game ball is won to the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and the round in which the game ball is won to the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65). By simply changing the interval time between the two, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of jackpot games that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, thereby providing the player with various playability, There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed so that it is possible to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the one specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as the jackpot scenario. Alternatively, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation contents of the switching member 65h can be set by using the special electric auditors product operation table 202h.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game. The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third, fifth, and seventh rounds.

  With this configuration, the round before the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be changed to the round where the second variable winning device 650 is opened. It is possible to have a plurality (three) of specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. There is an effect that the expectation can be given to the player a plurality of times during one big hit game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V-possible (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been fired at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3. If the game ball has not been fired at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, the appropriate game method is determined by the player. It is good to inform.

  Specifically, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding route 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within the specific interval period, and the third determination is performed based on the determination result. As the display for notifying the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display a content explaining the game method such as "Do not stop right-handing!" Or "If you keep firing, there is a chance of changing!" By performing such a display, next, when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (the fifth round or the seventh round), it is possible to support the game so that the player can perform an appropriate game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

  Note that the method of determining whether or not an appropriate game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described content, and another method may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball during the big hit game has been operated, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the steering wheel and determining that the right-hand game has not been performed is used. You may.

  Furthermore, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is played, the display may be emphasized in the case of a jackpot in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

  In addition, a big hit scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in successive rounds may be settable. By using such a configuration, even if the interval time is short, it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, further increase the variation, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  Next, the operation content of the special electric auditors product based on the small hit type will be described. There are small hit types from small hits 1 to small hits 3. The small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the time saving gaming state ST1h, and the small hit 2 is a gaming state that changes reliably. The small hit selected in the gaming state ST3. And the small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the game state is the latently variable game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)).

  Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the opening time and the ending time of the small hit 1 are set to 7.5 seconds, and the opening of 0.3 seconds is set to be repeated six times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which the high-speed opening is repeated, and the game ball hardly wins the specific winning opening during the small hit game (difficult).

  Next, the opening time and the ending time of the small hit 2 are set to 7.5 seconds as in the case of the small hit 1, but the opening operation during the round is performed once for 1.8 seconds. Is set. That is, at the small hit 2, the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening.

  Specifically, in the probability change game state ST3 in which the small hit 2 is selected (see FIG. 80 (a)), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls that win the special winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 winning balls per minute. Becomes

  Finally, for small hit 3, the opening operation during the round is the same as small hit 2, but the opening time and ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. In other words, the period in which the specific winning opening is in the closed state is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small win 2.

  Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 is a small hit. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls winning the special winning opening during the small hitting game is two and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is ten, about 480 winning balls can be obtained in one minute. .

  That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening, and further, it is a time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, the open state of the specific winning opening due to the small hit game can appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire many game balls, and there is an effect that the interest of the game is improved. Further, by adding another game property (a game property of waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game property of waiting for the jackpot game to be executed as in the conventional game, It is possible to provide various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 81B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223m and an advantageous information storage area 223n are added. Is the same as in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state. It is set to off when the low probability game state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during an advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period and the number of big hits and small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantage information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantage period flag 223m is set to off.

  Using the above-mentioned advantageous period flag 223m and the advantageous information storage area 223n, the number of game balls acquired by the player during the high-probability game continuation is temporarily stored, so that the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen in the latent probability changing game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S254). The first special symbol change stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. . As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S609, after the first symbol display device 37 is stopped changing the first special symbol, the process of S651 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric auditors operation table) specified for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. Is performed (S651).

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257). The second special symbol change stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol change stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. . As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1009, after the change stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the process of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the big hit scenario, an operation for each time in the big hit game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning port set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario elapses. After that, when a closing condition (for example, winning 10 balls or opening time of 30 seconds elapses) is satisfied, the specific winning opening is closed, and after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the next winning opening is closed. The jackpot round is started, and the opening of the specific winning opening is set.

  In the second embodiment, a jackpot scenario is stored in the ROM 202 in correspondence with the gaming state and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set in an open pattern in which a game ball can enter the probability changing switch 65e3, the opening period or the interval period is set to be variable so that the game ball can be set on the probability changing switch 65e3. It can be set as a jackpot that can enter the ball and a jackpot that cannot enter the ball. Thereby, it is possible to variably set the probability change rate for each game state by regulating the type of the big hit that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 according to the opening time or the interval time depending on the big hit game state.

  In a normal game state ST1 in which a normal game method is set in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow path PA1 and a game ball is made to enter the first starting port 630 to perform a game, the flow path is set to the right flow path PA2. When the game is played by causing the game ball to flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow path PA1 and the game is played, the first start port 630 is used. A game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 640 rather than a game ball being entered. Even if the player is in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the right flow path PA2 because a lottery chance in the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal game state with the second special symbol, even if the big hit type is opened in an open pattern in which the probability change switch 65e3 can enter the ball, the big hit type is set in the big hit scenario. Since the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 by the interval period, it is possible to pass the game ball through the certainty change switch 65e3. No probability change is given to the player, that is, the probability change rate of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal operation of playing a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1 is performed, the disadvantage of the game store can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each game state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1 and right flow path PA2) for performing the game are set by design, the probability of the probability variation in the winning opening entering the ball in different flow paths is disadvantageous for the player. Can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156). This ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156) is different from the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 41) in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, since the processes of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment are deleted, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the opening time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a are two times per second. The release pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern of the support state in which it is easy to always win the second starting port 640 is provided, and it is configured such that it can be set so as to easily win when the second starting port 640 is opened.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the right flow path PA2 to play a game (a time saving game state ST1h, a latent probability variation game state ST2, a probability variation game state ST3), the game ball is transmitted to the second starting port 640. Many prizes can be won. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is caused to flow down the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 630 than when the game ball is caused to flow down the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to perform the game by changing the second special symbol with priority, and it is possible to set the second special symbol so that the big hit is easily given to the player.

  Next, a jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) is different from the jackpot control process (S1604 in FIG. 46) in that the processes from S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has been set (S1721: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter d2 and updated (S1722). After that, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1721: No), this process ends. Note that data corresponding to the scenario counter is set in the jackpot scenario, and operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), an opening command is set (S1724). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1723 that the opening has not been started (S1723: No), the processing of S1624 is executed.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of a new round can be determined based on the big hit scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each big hit type. Can be controlled.

  Next, an ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (S1630 in FIG. 48) in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even in the case of the jackpot to which the probable changing game state is given, the jackpot type in which the upper limit of the number of times the ordinary symbol is reduced to the time saving state is set, so the process of S1731 (the time saving counter 203t) Is changed and the timing is set. Furthermore, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset in the final processing of the ending processing 2 (S1730) for setting the jackpot termination processing. Thereby, it can be determined from the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 whether or not a big hit game is being played.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the types of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the game state (the normal game state ST1, the time-saving game state ST1h, the latent probability changing game state) (ST2, probable change game state ST3) Based on the configuration in which a plurality of ratios to shift to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the probability change game state ST3, when the second lottery game that is not substantially the target of the fluctuation in the normal game state ST1 is performed. Extremely low (0% in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type is selected based on the special symbol type and the game state using the jackpot type selection table 202d. For example, the jackpot type based on the special symbol type is selected. The selection of the interval time based on the game state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, a jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table) is used to select an interval time corresponding to the gaming state. Select And you may make it perform big hit control using the selected big hit type and interval time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the main control device 110.

  In the above-described interval time type selection table, the game state is associated with the interval time (in the case of a certain game state, a specific interval time is always selected). A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter. With this configuration, it is possible to make the playability more complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, but the present invention is applied to other types of gaming machines. You may. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they have won the starting opening, or a change in one special symbol changes the other special symbol There are gaming machines of the type which are executed prior to the fluctuation of the game machine.

  Furthermore, a winning lottery is performed by a game ball winning at the first starting port, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning port is activated to be able to win. A first bonus game, a second bonus game in which the second winning opening is activated to enable winning when the result of the lottery is a second result, and a second bonus game during the second bonus game. Used as a gaming machine (1st and 2nd blender) having a third bonus game in which a first winning opening is activated so that a first winning opening can be activated by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the winning opening. You may.

  In the second embodiment, the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable prize device 650 is in the closed state. However, the second variable prize device 650 is in the open state. Alternatively, the game ball that has passed through a specific route may pass through the ball guiding route 72. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and to have an effect that the player can be entertained.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that has passed a specific route other than the ball guiding route 72 wins the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and to have an effect that the player can be entertained.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning ports are provided in the flow path of the game balls, and the game balls that have passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning ports in the closed state are specified on the lower (downstream) side. A game configured to be able to reach the winning opening, and further provided with a delay guiding path for delaying the time for the game ball to flow between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side). By changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the gaming state (normal, probability change, latency, time saving), the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed. Configure as possible.

  With this configuration, it is changed whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probable change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. The mode of the game state to be shifted (set) after the end of the big hit game can be changed. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass through V and a jackpot game that cannot pass through V (difficult) without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that is not possible (difficult) are set), and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. With such a configuration, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of jackpot games that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, thereby providing a variety of playability to the player and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable prize device 65 within the V validity period. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the one specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when a different time can be set as the specific interval time, during a jackpot game, the time of a predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time, It is preferable to make the total of the interval times in the same. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using the interval period in which the information processing amount is small during the big hit game, and to execute a stable process. It has the effect of becoming.

  In the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 (delayed guiding path) is provided so that the ball guiding path passage time becomes a predetermined time (delayed). However, the entrance (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge part 70e) of the path are provided. ) May be provided with a detecting means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball has passed within a predetermined time. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a clogged ball that has occurred in the ball guiding route 72 or an illegal act that intentionally causes the game ball to stay in the guiding route using a magnet or a ball with a thread. There is an effect that it becomes possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used for the following gaming machines. . That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game includes a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and a variable prize provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the twelfth round. The jackpot game in which the device (the second variable winning device 650) is opened and the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened from the 13th round to the 15th round is executed. You may use it for a game machine.

  By using the first variable prize device 65, the second variable prize device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a gaming machine, the launched game balls are wasted. In addition, the effect during the jackpot game can be enjoyed using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th round and the 13th round).

  Specifically, at the end of the twelfth round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance route 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guidance route 72 is placed in the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  An effect between rounds using the time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable prize device 65 (an effect that stimulates whether the current jackpot game is a 12 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot). By performing, the effect that even if the right-handed game is continued, useless game balls (game balls that do not win the specific winning opening of the variable winning device despite the big hit) can be eliminated (reduced). is there.

  In other words, if the above-described performance during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable prize device, it passes through the variable prize device during a specific interval time (the specific prize port of the variable prize device is closed). The game ball cannot be awarded to the specific winning opening even during the jackpot game, resulting in a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened to reduce useless game balls, the effect performed between the specific rounds (the effect that stimulates whether the current jackpot game is a 12 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot) There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect during the jackpot game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball guiding path 72 through which the game ball can flow down is set. Since the effect is performed during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) that the game ball flows down, the useless ball generated during the big hit can be suppressed, and the effect performed during the specific round (this big hit) There is an effect that the effect of inducing whether the game is a 12 round hit or a 15 round hit) can be enhanced.

  If the interval time between the specific rounds is set shorter than the time during which the game balls flow down the ball guiding path 72, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 reach the first variable winning device 65 before they reach the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of useless game balls.

  In this case, as an effect in this case, it is conceivable to divert display data displayed in the ending period of the 12 round jackpot and display the data at a specific interval time of the 15 round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and to make the player think that the 12th round is a big hit. When the 13th round starts, the player This has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  Further, a detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guidance route 72 is provided, and when the detecting means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, the current big hit is a 15-round big hit (the big hit is still The following may be notified. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the act of stopping the launch of the game ball during the interval period during the jackpot game.

  Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined, and the following may be performed. For example, a first variable prize device 65 and a second variable prize device 650 are arranged in parallel, and meanwhile, a game ball is meandered horizontally from the second variable prize device 650 toward the first variable prize device 65. A configuration provided with a guidance route for guiding the user to perform the following may be used for the following gaming machines. That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game includes a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and a variable prize winning device provided on the upstream side from the first round to the twelfth round ( The second variable prize device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable prize device (first variable prize device 65) provided on the downstream side is used for a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed. Is also good.

  In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the guidance path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guidance route is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device have a plurality of opening patterns set to be opened in a predetermined order during a single jackpot game, and the opening patterns are set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

  The open / close status of each variable winning device is configured to be displayed on the display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the state in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closed state is an interval period (during a big hit) or an ending period (a big hit end).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device closes and then the downstream variable winning device opens, the display means indicates that the variable winning device has closed. By displaying the effect (closing effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot game to be completed or to be continued. Then, when the interval period ends, the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, and at the same time, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device has been opened is displayed on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance route has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required for passing the guidance route rather than the interval time). Is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning device is closed), the game balls rolling on the guidance path are reliably won on the downstream variable winning device. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while performing the effect indicating that the variable winning device is closed in the big hit game. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of types of opening patterns of the variable winning devices in the jackpot game may be prepared.

  Hereinafter, Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 1 of Second Embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the above-described second embodiment, thereby providing a different game from that of the above-described second embodiment. As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the jackpot is won in the normal gaming state ST1 and the game mode shifts to the probable change gaming state ST3, the high level is set only for a predetermined period (for 100 rotations) after the end of the jackpot game. The game is provided with a gaming property (a so-called two-time loop) of winning a jackpot at least twice while maintaining the probability gaming state.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in this modification. The first modification differs from the above-described second embodiment in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, the distribution is the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of the jackpot in the probability change game state ST3 will be described.

  During the probable change game state ST3, the real fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if a big hit is won in the special figure 2, a 100% probability of a high probability game state (probable change game state ST3 or latent sure change game state ST2) Move to. In addition, if the probability of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot in the probability changing game state ST3, the game is shifted to the latent probability variation game state ST2 by ending the electric support. While staying in the probability-variation gaming state ST3 (until the electric support ends), the player plays a game while paying attention to winning the next big hit.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the distribution is set such that the return jackpot to shift to the probability changing game state ST3 is 34% and the jackpot to shift (fall) to the time saving game state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the distribution is set such that the pullback big hit that shifts to the certainty changing gaming state ST3 becomes 75%, and the big hit that shifts (falls) to the normal game state ST1 becomes 25%. In this time-saving gaming state ST1h, if a special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot, the electric support is terminated and the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. The distribution is set such that the winning rate of the jackpot during this time increases the ratio of shifting to the probable game state ST3, which is the high-probability game state, compared to the normal game state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the first modification, once the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) shifts to the high-probability game state (probable change game state ST3), the special symbol change 100 after the big hit occurs within a predetermined period. ), And then two jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning a jackpot within a predetermined period in a special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 2 of Second Embodiment>
In this modified example 2, the upper limit number (110 times) is provided for the number of games (the number of times of change) in the high-probability game state and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from the second embodiment described above. The present invention provides a different game from the second embodiment. As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game mode shifts to the probable change game state ST3, after the jackpot game ends, a specific period after a predetermined period (high probability game) Only during the game state and during the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), the gaming property (so-called two-time loop) of winning a jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state is maintained. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states in this modification are set. The second modification is different from the above-described second embodiment in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, the distribution is the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of the jackpot in the probability change game state ST3 will be described.

  In the second modification, the high-probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol changes 110 times without winning a jackpot. In this probable change game state ST3, the target of the substantial change is set in Toku-zu 2. When a big hit is won in Toku-zu 2, the probable change game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and low with a probability of 30%. Transition to probability state. If the change of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot in the probability changing game state ST3, the electronic support is ended, and the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  Next, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is a period from the end of the big hit until the 110th rotation when the number of times of the change of the special symbol is started from the 101st rotation and the high-probability game state shifts (falls) to the low-probability state. Is a game state executed. If a jackpot is won during the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state shifts to the high-probability gaming state (probable varying game state ST3 or latent probability varying game state ST2) with a probability of 100%.

  Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set such that the return jackpot to shift to the certain-change game state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot to shift (fall) to the normal game state ST1 is 10%. In this time-saving gaming state ST1h, if a special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot, the electric support is terminated and the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. The distribution is set such that the winning rate of the jackpot during this time increases the ratio of shifting to the probable game state ST3, which is the high-probability game state, compared to the normal game state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) temporarily shifts to the high-probability game state (probable change game state ST3), and thereafter, the number of fluctuations becomes a predetermined number (after the big hit). Only during a specific period (the latent probability changing game state ST2) after the elapse of the special symbol change (100 times), two big hits are guaranteed thereafter while maintaining the high-probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and thereafter, does not win within a predetermined period in a special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state, and after a predetermined period elapses The game can be continued while having the purpose of winning the jackpot during the specified period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 3 of Second Embodiment>
In the third modification, a point that a shortened path 75 is provided as another path to the ball guiding path 72 provided in the right side area of the gaming board 13 of the second embodiment as viewed from the front as another path, and the flowing ball is guided by the ball A distributing mechanism 75a for distributing the route 72 to the shortened route 75, a route for guiding the game balls flowing down the shortened route 75 to the first variable winning device 65, and a route for guiding the gaming ball to a lower area in front view of the game board 13. And a distributing mechanism 75b for distributing the data. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 of the third modification in a front view. In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guiding path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be able to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured such that the rotation range (rotation angle) is restricted by the rotation restriction member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guiding route 72 flow down the same route as in the above-described second embodiment, the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the ball is more linear than the ball guiding path 72, and at least the game balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 reach the discharging unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge the game ball from the shortened route 75, the time required for the game ball to pass through the shortened route is set to 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13 can be intentionally made different. (It becomes possible to cause the game board 13 to flow down in an order different from the order in which it was fired).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in a specific interval period, when a game ball that first passes through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortened path 75, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the first specific prize port 65a of the first variable prize device 65 can be awarded within the period, while the game ball that first passes through the second variable prize device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72, the probability change switch It becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period in which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probable change switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, thereby providing the player with the ability to pass the probable change switch 65e3 by himself / herself. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b for distributing a game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to a path for guiding the first variable winning device 65 to the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding the game ball to a lower area in front view of the game board 13 is provided. ing. This makes it possible to sort out whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened route 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game balls on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game balls.

  Further, even if a distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined according to a predetermined order is used as in the present modification, a plurality of distributions are required until the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the positive change switch 65e3. Since it is distributed to a plurality of flow-down routes by the mechanism, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the shot game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination in advance.

  Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down the ball guiding path 72 flow down on the first variable winning device 65, come into contact with the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotate the distribution mechanism 75b. It flows down toward the bottom of the game board while changing the state. As a result, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b always changes.

  Note that, in the present modified example, the configuration has been described in which only the game balls flowing down the shortened route 75 reach the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game balls flowing down the ball guidance route 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) for distributing only the game balls flowing down the ball guidance path 72 may be separately provided. With such a configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and, for example, can pass through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state. By using a pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not a given game ball wins the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, to which path is the game ball distributed? Thus, the possibility of entering the probable change game state can be changed.

  Also, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided on the path where the game balls flow down during a right-handed game other than during the jackpot game, the distribution of each of the distribution mechanisms is performed when a game in which the game balls pass through the certainty change switch 65e3 is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be randomized.

In this modification, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  In this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing game balls is used as a distributing mechanism. However, other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result is obtained. Means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable prize device 650 in the closed state reach the distribution mechanism 75a, but are located upstream of the second variable prize device 650 (when the game ball is the second variable prize device 650). (The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the sorting device 75a. In this case, the game balls distributed in a predetermined direction by the sorting device 75a are arranged in the second variable winning device. The game sphere that has flowed down toward and is distributed in a direction other than the predetermined direction separately passes through a specific flow-down route (for example, the shortened route 75 or the ball guidance route 72), and the game ball that has passed through the specific flow-down route is The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to the first variable winning device and the other routes. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the direction of the second variable prize device 650 to reach the first variable prize device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. .

  With this configuration, game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so as to be able to win. There is an effect that unexpected games can be provided.

  In addition, during the big hit game, by configuring so that the timing at which the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 is opened is not notified to the player, the movement of the game ball on the game board by the player Thus, there is an effect that the user can enjoy the game while watching the opening / closing status of each variable winning device.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (two-time loop configuration)
State setting means capable of at least setting a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a first privilege game and a privilege game executing means for executing at least a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second advantage state is set after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first privilege is set. After the execution of the game, the first advantageous state is set. Gaming machine A1, wherein is.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least a first privilege game for giving a benefit advantageous to the player and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game has been executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. Thereby, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is configured to execute the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, A gaming machine A2 for setting the specific state after execution of a third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. Thus, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuation of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that gambling of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. Has the effect of being able to suppress that

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the bonus game executing means is improved so that the privilege game is easily executed. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the bonus game to be executed.

  In one of the gaming machines A1 and A4, a starting condition determining unit that can determine whether a first starting condition and a second starting condition different from the first starting condition are satisfied, and the starting condition determining unit. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, wherein the privilege game execution means includes a specific lottery performed by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5 for executing the privilege game based on a determination that a result has been established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effect is exhibited in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A4. That is, the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are each determined by the start condition determining means. The lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the first condition or the second start condition is satisfied by the start condition judging means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination by the lottery means that the specific lottery result is established. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting unit, the gaming machine A5 includes a regulating unit that regulates establishment of the second starting condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, if the setting means does not set the advantageous state, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulating means. There is an effect that the disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition and a second identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition. (2) dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the identification information on the display means, the dynamic display means being capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. A gaming machine A6, which is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A3 to A5. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are respectively displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine A7, wherein the gaming machine A5 or A6 has releasing means for releasing the regulation by the regulating means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the regulation by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Setting means, and control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, even when the bonus game is executed next. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine A8, a privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means even when the bonus game is executed next. It can be set to continue over the straddle. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous switching, preventing disadvantageous side)
A first lottery game based on having a first entrance where game balls can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and having entered the first entrance. A lottery game executing means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and a second lottery game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. Switching means for switching the first state and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity; and a lottery game disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the ball entering the first entrance. In addition, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance that is different from the first entrance. A switching unit switches between a first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity. Can be The execution of the lottery game disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is suppressed by the suppression means. Accordingly, the execution of the disadvantageous lottery game is suppressed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that significantly disadvantages the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating a lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on a display unit, and second identification information indicating a lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on a display unit. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determining means is configured such that a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched disadvantageously by the switching means is longer than a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched advantageously. A gaming machine B2 for facilitating determination of a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. Further, the second identification information indicating the result of the lottery of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched disadvantageously by the switching means is dynamically determined to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched to advantage. The determination is facilitated by the means. Thereby, execution of the game switched disadvantageously can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine a game that is set to be advantageous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, there is a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball fired by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at a position where a game ball fired by the firing means can enter the state in which the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, the game ball is fired by the firing means in the game area. The firing force of the game ball fired by the firing means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where game balls fired from the firing means can enter the state in which the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. This allows the player to execute a lottery game that is advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the game machine has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player, When the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game, the privilege giving means is set to have a higher rate of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is provided to the player by the privilege provision means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game rather than in the first lottery game, the grant ratio of the benefit that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to set a more advantageous state to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, the privilege granting unit may select one of the first privilege and a second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege. A gaming machine B5 for providing one of them, wherein the switching means switches to the second state based on the second privilege being provided by the privilege providing means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the second lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the rate at which the set benefit set to be more likely to result in a specific lottery result is set higher than the benefit for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the first lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. The second lottery game is executed because the rate at which the setting privilege set such that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game. This has the effect of increasing the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, the bonus provided to the second lottery game by the bonus granting means is configured so that at least the set bonus is provided. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set benefit is configured to be provided to the benefit provided to the second lottery game by the benefit providing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game will be executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first ball inlet are connected to the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, which is disposed in each of the second flow paths, and wherein the second entrance is disposed in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is disposed in the first flow path and the second flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second entrance. Since they are arranged in two channels, there is an effect that a state in which only the first lottery game is executed can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression means reports information indicating that a disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means indicates that when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed, the disadvantageous lottery game is executed. Since the notification information is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  The gaming machine B10 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, wherein the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be played efficiently. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic C group> (Electric tube configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where game balls can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the fact that the first entrance has been entered. And a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance, Variable means that can be changed between a first state that regulates the entering ball and a second state that facilitates the entering of the ball more than the first state, determining means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the determination A variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means; and Regulating means for regulating entry and regulating the execution of the second lottery. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the ball having entered the first ball entrance. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first variable state is changed by the variable means between a first state in which the ball enters the first ball entrance and a second state in which the first state is easier than the first state. When a specific determination result is determined by the determination unit that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the variable unit is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control unit. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the regulation unit regulates the entry into the second entrance or the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, the state advantageous to the player and the state disadvantageous to the player can be set by the restricting means. Therefore, it is possible to give a change of interest to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and when the variable means enters the second state, the variable means enters the second entrance by the variable means. The regulating means is disposed so as to prevent the flowing of the game ball flowing down the flowing channel, and the regulating means sets the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second incoming ball is set. A gaming machine C2 for restricting a ball from entering the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged to prevent the game balls flowing down the flow path entering the second ball entrance from flowing down. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second entrance is regulated by the regulating means. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the entry to the second entrance with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance is provided with the first flow path. And the second flow path, wherein the variable means is disposed at the first entrance provided in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is disposed in the first channel and the second channel, respectively. Since the variable means is disposed at the first ball entrance arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily made to enter the first ball entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the lottery by the first lottery and second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof Means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, wherein the control means controls the dynamic of the second identification information. A gaming machine C4 wherein the execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy for the dynamic display period determining means to determine a long dynamic display period as a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. Since the long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information is easily determined by the dynamic display period determination unit, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restriction unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuous up configuration)
A first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a first entrance based on a game ball entering the first entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery and performing a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on that the game ball has entered the second entrance; Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result on a display means, and dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a lottery result of the second lottery on a display means; A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information to be executed by the dynamic display means; A dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode When displayed, a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player to the player, and a lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means. A privilege determining means for determining at least one of a first privilege and a second privilege having a smaller number of privileges than the first privilege based on the first and second identification information. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display And a setting means for making it easier for the privilege determining means to determine the second privilege in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance. A second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball entering the second entrance. First identification information indicating a lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. Second identification information indicating a lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined by the dynamic display period determining means as a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting unit. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided to the player by the privilege providing means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, at least the first privilege and the second privilege that has less privilege than the first privilege are provided as the privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means. Either is determined by the privilege determining means. If either one of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from the above is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second benefit is easily set by the setting means by the privilege determination means in the first lottery. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on predetermined conditions, and the setting means has a specific game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine D2, characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means in the first lottery by the privilege determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second privilege when a specific game state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting means, and setting of the advantageous state by the setting means. The gaming machine D3, further comprising: a control unit that makes it easier for the setting unit to set the advantageous state even when the privilege is next given based on the fact that the bonus has been given.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the setting state sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the setting means even when the next privilege is given by the control means. There is an effect that the setting can be easily made and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Feature E group> (low probability change rate of non-priority is set low)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine E1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, a launching means capable of firing a game ball based on an operation of a player, a first ballistic means capable of entering a game ball fired from the firing means, and a first ballistic means thereof A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a ball entry assisting means for allowing game balls to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means First discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on that a game ball has entered the ball, and second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. And first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination unit are simultaneously dynamic. Display means capable of being displayed, the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result, or When the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. A game state in which one of a first state which is set so as to allow the game and a second state which is set so as not to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. Setting means, and when the first state is set by the game state setting means and when the second state is set, when the specific second determination result is obtained, the determining means A gaming machine E2 comprising: a ratio varying unit that varies a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the gaming state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set to be low, the game is made to enter the second ball entry means in the second state. There is an effect that even if cheating is performed, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability in the second state to be lower than that in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal operation is performed in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and A gaming machine E4, comprising: a second flow path through which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball entry rate of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is changed by the flow path, so that the game balls flow down. There is an effect that the game can be changed by the flowing channel, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means may be placed in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine E5, wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable ball entry means. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Feature F group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous symbols can be changed during the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which the game balls can pass and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game balls to pass than the open state, and a first variable means disposed downstream of the first variable means; A second variable ball-in means capable of entering a game ball having passed through one variable means, a specific area in which a game ball having entered the second variable ball-in means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the passing, and the first variable means and the second variable ball entry as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific condition. A variable control means for varying the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable means is determined by the determination means. The variable pattern includes the When the variable means is in the open state, it is possible that the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means can enter the specific area, and that the game ball can enter the specific area rather than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine F1 wherein at least a difficult disadvantageous pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball-in means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entering means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and the first entering means A second ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered into the second ball entry means. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit that performs the second determination. Display means capable of simultaneously and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and displaying the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display unit, A bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game, and a game state setting for setting one gaming state from a plurality of different gaming states based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means. Means, and ratio setting means for variably setting a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set and a ratio at which the disadvantageous pattern is set, in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine F2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set is changed in accordance with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by varying the degree of expectation for the privilege given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a first probability is determined as a probability that the first determination unit or the second determination unit determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the first probability is determined based on the first probability. A probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability, and the privilege provided by the privilege providing means is such that the second probability is set by at least the probability setting means. Gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area. By having an interest in whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening of the first variable means is different. A gaming machine F4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player can determine the start of the bonus game at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be determined. Can be hardly recognized by the player, and even if the pattern is disadvantageous, it is possible to expect the player to enter a specific area.

  In the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F4 has guiding means for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first variable entering means to the second variable entering means for a predetermined period or more, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable entering means has A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the gaming machine F5 is at least set so that the second variable ball-in means is changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period from the opening state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the passing of gaming balls to a specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Feature G group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous symbols can be changed in the interval period)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern have at least a period from the time when the first variable pitching means changes to the closed state to the time when the second variable pitching means changes to the open state. A gaming machine G2 that is set differently.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guiding means for guiding to the means for a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that the second variable entering means is changed to the closed state after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state, and the second variable The gaming machine G3, wherein the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult to cause the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a A second ball entry means different from the one ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means A second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on that the game ball has entered the first discriminator; Means for dynamically displaying simultaneously the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means; and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific identification information. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display unit A bonus game execution means for executing the privilege game, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the game A gaming machine G4 comprising: ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in accordance with the gaming state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in accordance with the gaming state. Accordingly, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the game ball enters the specific area can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting one of two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area. By making the player interested in whether or not the game ball can be passed through, it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (New zero attacker)
A condition judging means for judging the satisfaction of the specific condition, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition judging means. A first variable ball-in means which is variable to the first variable ball-in means, a second variable ball-in means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball-in means, and a game in the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means Privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the ball having entered the ball, and the first variable ballistic means and the second variable ballistic means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the ball entry means are varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state; the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means Between the first variable ball entry means is closed If the on purpose made, the gaming machine and wherein the time-to-game ball reaches the second variable ball entrance means those having a guide means for more than a predetermined period H1.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and the flow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using two variable winning devices, so that further gaming is performed. It was demanded that the entertainment be improved. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the period until reaching the second variable ball-in means by the guiding means is set to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball-in means before the ball-in means is opened, and the interest of the game is lowered.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect execution means includes: an open effect indicating that the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means is in the open state when the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means is in the open state; When the ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are each in the closed state, the closed variable effect has at least a closed performance indicating that it is in the closed state, and the closed performance is within the predetermined period. A game machine H2, which is executed by the game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, it is possible to use a predetermined period to notify the player of the closed state in the closing effect, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when one of the privilege games is executed by the privilege game execution means, the order in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are respectively changed to the open state. A gaming machine H3 comprising: an open pattern determining means for determining the set open pattern from a plurality of open patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of open patterns, there is an effect that the open pattern can be randomized and the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means, a timing for changing the first variable ball-entering means or the second variable ball-inserting means from the closed state to the open state is set in advance. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being used.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the timing of changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern, so that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable input means are set according to the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized, and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (two loops only during the predetermined period after the jackpot)
State setting means capable of at least setting a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a first privilege game and a privilege game executing means for executing at least a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second advantage state is set after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first privilege is set. After the execution of the game, the first advantageous state is set, and Setting a second advantageous state when a specific condition is satisfied without the first privilege game or the second privilege game being executed by the privilege game execution means after the first advantageous state is set; A gaming machine I1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole provided on the game board surface, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of a jackpot is determined. There are games that provide high-probability games with high probabilities. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until a jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once the high-probability game is started, the player is promised to win the jackpot twice while maintaining the high-probability game. However, there is a problem that they get tired of playing games. The gaming machine I1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the tiredness of a player.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least the first advantageous state advantageous to the player and the second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least a first privilege game for giving a benefit advantageous to the player and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game has been executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game execution means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. Accordingly, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is configured to execute the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2, wherein the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. Thus, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuation of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that gambling of the game becomes too high.

  The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, and when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine I3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination is performed when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. Is satisfied, the player can play the game with an interest in the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. The game is played while expecting that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  A probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability determined as the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability higher than the first probability in one of the gaming machines I3 and I4. The gaming machine I5, wherein the first advantage state and the second advantage state are such that the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I3 or I4. That is, the probability setting means sets at least one of a first probability that is determined as a specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are states in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result in a short time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Structure of winning distribution to attacker)
A condition judging means for judging the satisfaction of the specific condition, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition judging means. The first variable ball-in means, the second variable ball-in means disposed downstream of the first variable ball-in means, and the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means. A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the game ball being entered, and the first variable ball entry means and the second variable entering means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is varied in a predetermined order until the open condition is satisfied until a predetermined condition is satisfied; the first variable ball entry means; Distribute at least game balls to the downstream side of ball means First allocating means, and the game balls distributed by the first allocating means to the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means to the second variable ball-in means and the downstream side of the second variable ball-in means. A gaming machine J1 having at least a second sorting means for sorting.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a jackpot lottery of a special symbol is performed, and when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the game is performed. There is a game which provides a jackpot game in which a game ball is put into a special winning opening provided on a board. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which two large winning ports are provided on a gaming board surface (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, there was a problem that a game ball that did not enter one of the special winning openings did not enter the other special winning opening, and the flow of the game balls on the gaming board was poor. . The gaming machine J1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of gaming balls that makes a player expect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, based on the determination that the specific ball is satisfied, opens the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the game ball. The first variable ball entry means is changed to a state. A second variable ball entry means is disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry unit or the second variable ball entry unit, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting unit. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are opened by the privilege game execution means in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Perform a variable bonus game. The first distributing means distributes at least game balls to the first variable ball-in means and the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means, and distributes the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means by the second variable ball-in means. The distribution means distributes at least to the second variable pitching means and the downstream side of the second variable pitching means. As a result, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of gaming balls that gives a player expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first distributing means and the second distributing means include a rotating part rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating part thereof. And a regulating means for regulating a rotation range of the game machine at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first distribution means and the second distribution means are moved by the rotating portion in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction. Since it is rotatable and the restricting means restricts the range of rotation of the rotating portion at a predetermined angle, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine J2, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing game balls. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball-in means is in a closed state, a guiding means for guiding a game ball to the second variable ball-in means, and the guiding ball is used to guide the game ball to the second variable ball-in means. When the vehicle is guided to the two variable ball-in means, when the second variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the vehicle has a guiding path for guiding the guided game ball to the second sorting means. A gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2. That is, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the guiding ball guides the game ball to the second variable ball entry means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball-in means by the guiding means, and when the second variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. And a taxiway. Thereby, the rotation state of the second distribution unit can be changed. Therefore, the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member can be complicated, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regulation rate of one symbol at normal time is regulated by variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine K1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entering means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a first entering means thereof A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a ball entry assisting means for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means First discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball, and second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. And first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination unit are displayed, respectively. Display means, and one of the first identification information and the second identification information is determined in advance. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the priority order, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result. A bonus game execution unit for executing the bonus game when displayed, a first state set to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entry unit and play a game, (2) a game state setting means for setting one of a second state which is set so as not to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means and play a game, and the first state being set by the game state setting means. A ratio varying unit that varies a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determining unit when the specific second determination result is obtained between when the setting is performed and when the second state is set; Characterized by having Game machine K2 to.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the game state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set to be low, the game is made to enter the second ball entry means in the second state. There is an effect that even if cheating is performed, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability in the second state to be lower than that in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal operation is performed in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and A game machine K4, comprising: a second flow path through which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the ball entry rate of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is changed by the flow path, so that the game balls flow down. There is an effect that the game can be changed by the flowing channel, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. A gaming machine K5 wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to make the second variable ball-entering means enter the ball. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic L group> (variation of the probability of variation by opening and interval with a configuration other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine L1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a first ball entry means. A second ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered into the second ball entry means. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit that performs the second determination. Display means capable of displaying second identification information indicating a second determination result of the determination, and one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the specific first determination A bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game when the first identification information indicating the result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means; A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the means; and the advantage pattern corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. A game machine L2 comprising: a ratio variable setting means for variably setting a ratio between the disadvantage pattern and the disadvantage pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in accordance with the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation of the ball entering can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and a first probability higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting one of two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine L3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is stored in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By having an interest in whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are such that the first variable ball entry means varies the closed state and then the second variable ball entry means varies the open state. The game machine L4 is set so that at least the period until is different.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. A gaming machine L5 wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 The gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any one of the above embodiments, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether or not the game is successful is determined by a lottery. An advantageous privilege game was being executed.
Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine which provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-265765).
By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine merely controls the switching of the entrance to be opened as a privilege game, and further interest in the game has been demanded.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine in which, in the gaming machine described above, the interest of the game is further improved.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 has a first variable state which can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where it is more difficult to enter game balls than the open state. Ball entry means, a second variable ball entry means disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter the ball, The first variable input as a privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area. Variable control means for varying the ball means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern; and decision means for determining the variable pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. And a variable pattern determined by the determining means. There are advantageous patterns in which game balls that have not entered the first variable ball entry means when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, At least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein a launching means capable of firing a game ball based on a player's operation and a gaming ball fired by the firing means can enter the game machine. A first ball entry means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first discrimination for executing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. Means, a second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means, and a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means. Display means capable of displaying first identification information and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, respectively; and the first identification information and the second identification information Dynamic display of either one of the information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order When the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display unit, the bonus game A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and the game state setting means. A ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in accordance with the set gaming state.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. A probability setting means that can set either the first probability to be performed or a second probability higher than the first probability. The privilege given by the privilege granting means is at least set by the probability setting means. The second probability is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are configured such that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The period from when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state is set to be at least different.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first variable ball-in means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the open state; A second variable ball entry means disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls entering the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the specific area. A bonus granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the passing of the game ball; and a first variable ball entry means serving as a privileged game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific condition. A variable control means for varying the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns; In the variable pattern determined by the means, (1) When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern is more specific than the advantageous pattern. At least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern, There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the operation of the player and the launching means provided by the launching means A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first ball entry means based on that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means. First discriminating means for performing discrimination, second discriminating means for performing second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means, and the first discrimination by the first discriminating means. Display means capable of displaying first identification information indicating a first determination result of the second determination information and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination means; Either the identification information or the second identification information is determined based on a predetermined priority order. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed on the display means. In the case, a privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, There is provided a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means. As a result, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set according to the gaming state is varied by the ratio varying means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which of the advantageous state and the disadvantageous pattern is set in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the specific first determination result or the identification is obtained by the first determining means or the second determining means. Has a probability setting means capable of setting either a first probability determined as a second determination result of the above and a second probability higher than the first probability, wherein the privilege granted by the privilege granting means is , At least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the benefits provided by the benefit providing means, and to enhance the interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are different from each other in that the first variable ball-in means is The period from the change to the closed state to the change of the second variable ball entry means to the open state is set to be at least different. This allows the player to be interested in the period from when the variable ball-in means is changed to the closed state to when the variable ball-in means is changed to the open state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
65 First variable winning device ( second variable ball entry means)
72- ball guidance route (an example of guidance means)
650 second variable winning device (first variable ball entry means)
S1604 bonus game execution means

Claims (2)

First variable ball entry means capable of being changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and
A second variable ball entry means arranged downstream of the first variable ball entry means and capable of being changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to enter to an open state in which game balls can enter,
A bonus game in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are respectively changed to the open state in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the specific condition being satisfied. Gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of
The second variable ball entry means, based on the passing of the game ball, a specific area in which a game state advantageous to the player is set after the privilege game is completed,
A first state in which a game ball that has entered the second variable ball-in means can pass through the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the second variable ball-in means than in the first state. Variable means for changing to a second state in which it is difficult to pass,
The gaming machine is
Between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has flowed downstream without entering the first variable ball entry means reaches the second variable ball entry means. Guidance means that can make the period until the predetermined period longer than
When the privilege game is executed, one of a plurality of patterns can be set as a timing for changing each of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to the open state. Setting means, and
As before Symbol plurality of patterns that can Rukoto set by the setting means has a first pattern and a second pattern is difficult to pass gaming ball the specific region than the first pattern, at least That is
The second pattern is a state in which, after the first variable ball-in means changes from the open state to the closed state, game balls that have entered the second variable ball-in means can pass through the specific area. The period in which the second variable ball-in means is in the open state is set to be shorter than the predetermined period,
The variable means, when the second variable ball-in means is opened from the closed state to the open state, a period until a game ball entered in the second variable ball-in means reaches the variable means. A first operation that is changed from the second state to the first state in a shorter period, and a period longer than a period until a game ball that has entered the second variable ball-entering unit reaches the variable unit. A second operation that is changed from the second state to the first state during a period,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of changing a rate at which the first pattern is set by the setting means based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images